WO1998022493A2 - N-(ARYL/HETEROARYL) AMINO ACID DERIVATIVES, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING SAME, AND METHODS FOR INHIBITING β-AMYLOID PEPTIDE RELEASE AND/OR ITS SYNTHESIS BY USE OF SUCH COMPOUNDS - Google Patents

N-(ARYL/HETEROARYL) AMINO ACID DERIVATIVES, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING SAME, AND METHODS FOR INHIBITING β-AMYLOID PEPTIDE RELEASE AND/OR ITS SYNTHESIS BY USE OF SUCH COMPOUNDS Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO1998022493A2
WO1998022493A2 PCT/US1997/018704 US9718704W WO9822493A2 WO 1998022493 A2 WO1998022493 A2 WO 1998022493A2 US 9718704 W US9718704 W US 9718704W WO 9822493 A2 WO9822493 A2 WO 9822493A2
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
dichlorophenyl
alanyl
group
methyl ester
alkyl
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/US1997/018704
Other languages
French (fr)
Other versions
WO1998022493A3 (en
Inventor
James E. Audia
Beverly K. Folmer
Varghese John
Lee H. Latimer
Jeffrey S. Nissen
Warren J. Porter
Eugene D. Thorsett
Jing Wu
Original Assignee
Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc.
Eli Lilly And Company
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc., Eli Lilly And Company filed Critical Elan Pharmaceuticals, Inc.
Priority to AU53543/98A priority Critical patent/AU5354398A/en
Priority to CA002270876A priority patent/CA2270876A1/en
Priority to JP52364998A priority patent/JP2001519769A/en
Priority to BR9714358A priority patent/BR9714358A/en
Priority to HU0001383A priority patent/HUP0001383A3/en
Priority to IL12947797A priority patent/IL129477A0/en
Priority to NZ335157A priority patent/NZ335157A/en
Priority to EP97950576A priority patent/EP0942923A2/en
Publication of WO1998022493A2 publication Critical patent/WO1998022493A2/en
Publication of WO1998022493A3 publication Critical patent/WO1998022493A3/en
Priority to NO992426A priority patent/NO992426L/en

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06Dipeptides
    • C07K5/06191Dipeptides containing heteroatoms different from O, S, or N
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/28Drugs for disorders of the nervous system for treating neurodegenerative disorders of the central nervous system, e.g. nootropic agents, cognition enhancers, drugs for treating Alzheimer's disease or other forms of dementia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06Dipeptides
    • C07K5/06008Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/06017Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic
    • C07K5/06026Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aliphatic the side chain containing 0 or 1 carbon atom, i.e. Gly or Ala
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07KPEPTIDES
    • C07K5/00Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof
    • C07K5/04Peptides containing up to four amino acids in a fully defined sequence; Derivatives thereof containing only normal peptide links
    • C07K5/06Dipeptides
    • C07K5/06008Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral
    • C07K5/06078Dipeptides with the first amino acid being neutral and aromatic or cycloaliphatic
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K38/00Medicinal preparations containing peptides

Definitions

  • This invention relates to compounds which inhibit 0-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis, and, accordingly, have utility in treating Alzheimer's disease.
  • This invention also relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising such compounds as well as methods for inhibiting release of ⁇ -amyloid peptide.
  • AD Alzheimer's Disease
  • AD failureia
  • AD in aged humans and is believed to represent the fourth most common medical cause of death in the United States.
  • AD has been observed in races and ethnic groups worldwide and presents a major present and future public health problem. The disease is currently estimated to affect about two to three million individuals in the United States alone. AD is at present incurable. No treatment that effectively prevents AD or reverses its symptoms and course is currently known.
  • the brains of individuals with AD exhibit characteristic lesions termed senile (or amyloid) plaques, amyloid angiopathy (amyloid deposits in blood vessels) and neurofibrillary tangles.
  • senile or amyloid
  • amyloid angiopathy amyloid deposits in blood vessels
  • neurofibrillary tangles Large numbers of these lesions, particularly amyloid plaques and neurofibrillary tangles, are generally found in several areas of the human brain important for memory and cognitive function in patients with AD. Smaller numbers of these lesions in a more restrictive anatomical distribution are also found in the brains of most aged humans who do not have clinical AD.
  • Amyloid plaques and amyloid angiopathy also characterize the brains of individuals with Trisomy 21 (Down's Syndrome) and Hereditary Cerebral Hemorrhage with Amyloidosis of the Dutch Type (HCHWA-D).
  • a definitive diagnosis of AD usually requires observing the aforementioned lesions in the brain tissue of patients who have died with the disease or, rarely, in small biopsied samples of brain tissue taken during an invasive neurosurgical procedure.
  • amyloid angiopathy amyloid angiopathy characteristic of AD and the other disorders mentioned above is an approximately 4.2 kilodalton (kD) protein of about 39-43 amino acids designated the /3-amyloid peptide ( / SAP) or sometimes A ⁇ , A3P or /3/A4.
  • ⁇ - Amyloid peptide was first purified and a partial amino acid sequence was provided by Glenner, et al. 1 The isolation procedure and the sequence data for the first 28 amino acids are described in U.S. Patent No. 4,666,829 2 .
  • / 3-amyloid peptide is a small fragment of a much larger precursor protein (APP), that is normally produced by cells in many tissues of various animals, including humans.
  • APP precursor protein
  • Knowledge of the structure of the gene encoding the APP has demonstrated that /3-amyloid peptide arises as a peptide fragment that is cleaved from APP by protease enzyme(s).
  • protease enzyme(s) The precise biochemical mechanism by which the / 3-amyloid peptide fragment is cleaved from APP and subsequently deposited as amyloid plaques in the cerebral tissue and in the walls of the cerebral and meningeal blood vessels is currently unknown.
  • a mutation at amino acid 693 of the 770-amino acid isoform of APP has been identified as the cause of the /3-amyloid peptide deposition disease, HCHWA-D, and a change from alanine to glycine at amino acid 692 appears to cause a phenotype that resembles AD is some patients but HCHWA-D in others.
  • the discovery of these and other mutations in APP in genetically based cases of AD prove that alteration of APP and subsequent deposition of its J-amyloid peptide fragment can cause AD.
  • the treatment methods would advantageously be based on drugs which are capable of inhibiting /3-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis.
  • This invention is directed to the discovery of a class of compounds which inhibit 3-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis and, therefore, are useful in the prevention of AD in patients susceptible to AD and/or in the treatment of patients with AD in order to inhibit further deterioration in their condition.
  • the class of compounds having the described properties are defined by formula I below:
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of (a) phenyl, (b) a substituted phenyl group of formula II:
  • R c is selected from the group consisting of acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, azido, cyano, halo, hydrogen, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, and wherein R b and R c are fused to form a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring with the phenyl ring,
  • R b and R b' are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, alkoxy, and thioalkoxy with the proviso that when R c is hydrogen, then R b and R b' are either both hydrogen or both substituents other than hydrogen,
  • substituted heteroaryl containing 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, thioalkoxy and thioaryloxy provided that said substituents are not ortho (adjacent) to the heteroaryl attachment to the -NH group;
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylthioalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl and substituted heteroaryl provided that the substituents are not ortho (adjacent) to the attachment of the aryl or heteroaryl atom to the carbon atom;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, and heterocyclic;
  • X is -C(O)Y where Y is selected from the group consisting of (a) alkyl,
  • substituted alkyl with the proviso that the substitution on said substituted alkyl does not include ⁇ -haloalkyl, ⁇ -diazoalkyl or ⁇ -OC(O)alkyl groups,
  • X can also be -CR 4 R 4 Y' where each R 4 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic and Y' is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, thiol, -OC(O)R 5 , -SSR 5 , -
  • this invention is directed to a method for inhibiting /3-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis in a cell which method comprises administering to such a cell an amount of a compound or a mixture of compounds of formula I above effective in inhibiting the cellular release and/or synthesis of /3-amyloid peptide.
  • this invention is directed to a prophylactic method for preventing the onset of AD in a patient at risk for developing AD which method comprises administering to said patient a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically inert carrier and an effective amount of a compound or a mixture of compounds of formula I above.
  • this invention is directed to a therapeutic method for treating a patient with AD in order to inhibit further deterioration in the condition of that patient which method comprises administering to said patient a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically inert carrier and an effective amount of a compound or a mixture of compounds of formula I above.
  • R 1 substituted phenyls are preferably 4-substituted, 3,5-disubstituted or 3,4-disubstituted phenyl substituents wherein the substituents at the 3 and/or 5 positions are defined by R b , R b' as above and the substituents at the 4 position is defined by R c as above.
  • Particularly preferred are 4-substituted, 3,5-disubstituted or 3,4-disubstituted phenyl substituents wherein the substituents at the 3 and/or 5 positions are defined by R b , R b' as above and the substituents at the 4 position is defined by R c as above.
  • 3,5-disubstituted phenyls include, by way of example, 3,5-dichlorophenyl, 3,5- difluorophenyl, 3,5-di(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 3,5-dimethoxyphenyl, and the like.
  • preferred 3,4-disubstituted phenyls include, by way of example, 3,4-dichlorophenyl, 3,4-difluorophenyl, 3-(trifluoromethyl)-4- chlorophenyl, 3-chloro-4-cyanophenyl, 3-chloro-4-iodophenyl, 3,4- methylenedioxyphenyl, and the like.
  • Particularly preferred 4-substituted phenyls include, by way of example, 4-azidophenyl, 4-bromophenyl, 4- chlorophenyl, 4-cyanophenyl, 4-ethylphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4-iodophenyl, 4- (phenylcarbonyl)phenyl, 4-(l-ethoxy)ethylphenyl, and the like.
  • R 1 substituents include, by way of example, 2-naphthyl, quinolin-3-yl, 2-methylquinolin-6-yl, benzothiazol-6-yl, benzothiazol-2-yl, 5-indolyl, phenyl, 2-naphthyl, and the like.
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylthioalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl and substituted heteroaryl provided that the substituents are not ortho to the attachment of the aryl or heteroaryl atom to the carbon atom.
  • Particularly preferred R 2 substituents include, by way of example, methyl, ethyl, /z-propyl, w ⁇ -propyl, n- butyl, iro-butyl, -CH 2 CH 2 SCH 3 , phenyl and the like.
  • R 3 substituents include alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, WO-propyl, n-butyl, wo-butyl, sec-butyl, and the like; substituted alkyl groups such as ⁇ -hydroxyefhyl, -CH 2 -cyclohexyl, benzyl, /j-hydroxybenzyl, 3-iodo-4-hydroxybenzyl, 3,5-diiodo-4-hydroxybenzyl, -CH 2 -indol-3-yl, phenyl,
  • Preferred X substituents include -C(O)Y groups where Y is methoxy, ethyoxy, n-propoxy, iso-propoxy, n-butoxy, iso-butoxy, t -butoxy, amino (-NH 2 ), N-(/ ⁇ ?-butyl)amino, N-methylamino, N,N-dimethylamino, N-benzylamino, and the like as well as where X is -CH 2 OH and the like.
  • This invention also provides for novel pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmaceutically inert carrier and a compound of the formula I above.
  • Particularly preferred compounds for use in the methods and compositions of this invention include, by way of example, the following wherein the stereochemistry of the R 2 and R 3 groups is preferably derived from the L-amino acid:
  • R 1 is selected from the group consisting of
  • R c is selected from the group consisting of acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, azido, cyano, halo, hydrogen, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, and wherein R b and R c are fused to form a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring with the phenyl ring,
  • R b and R b' are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, alkoxy, and thioalkoxy with the proviso that when R c is hydrogen, then R b and R b' are either both hydrogen or both substituents other than hydrogen, (c) 2-naphthyl, (d) 2-naphthyl substituted at the 4, 5, 6, 7 and/or 8 positions with 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, aryl, and heteroaryl,
  • heteroaryl and (f) substituted heteroaryl containing 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, thioalkoxy and thioaryloxy provided that said substituents are not ortho to the heteroaryl attachment to the -NH group;
  • R 2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylthioalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl and substituted heteroaryl provided that the substituents are not ortho to the attachment of the aryl or heteroaryl atom to the carbon atom;
  • R 3 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, and heterocyclic;
  • X is -C(O)Y where Y is selected from the group consisting of
  • R' and R" are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and where R' and R" are joined to form a cyclic group having from 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally containing 1 to 2 additional heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen and optionally substituted with one or more alkyl or alkoxy groups, and when R 3 contains at least 3 carbon atoms, X can also be -CR 4 R 4 Y' where each R 4 is independendy selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic and Y' is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, thiol, -OC(O)R 5 , -SSR 5 , -SSC(O)R 5 where R 5 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted
  • Preferred compounds of formula III above include those set forth below in Table I below:
  • this invention relates to compounds which inhibit / 3-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis, and, accordingly, have utility in treating Alzheimer's disease.
  • this invention relates to compounds which inhibit / 3-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis, and, accordingly, have utility in treating Alzheimer's disease.
  • /3-amyloid peptide refers to a 39-43 amino acid peptide having a molecular weight of about 4.2 kD which peptide is substantially homologous to the form of the protein described by Glenner, et al. 1 including mutations and post-translational modifications of the normal /3-amyloid peptide.
  • the ⁇ -amyloid peptide is approximately a 39-43 amino acid fragment of a large membrane-spanning glycoprotein, referred to as the ⁇ - amyloid precursor protein (APP). Its 43-amino acid sequence is: 1
  • Alkyl refers to monovalent alkyl groups preferably having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-p ⁇ opyl, n-butyl, iso- butyl, n-hexyl, and the like.
  • Substituted alkyl refers to an alkyl group, preferably of from 1 to 10 carbon atoms, having from 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cycloalkyl, oxyacylamino, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, nitro, and mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di- (substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-cycloalkylamino, mono- and di- arylamino, mono- and di-heteroaryl-amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents
  • Alkylene refers to divalent alkylene groups preferably having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methylene (-CH 2 -), ethylene (-CH 2 CH 2 -), the propylene isomers (e.g. , -CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 - and -CH(CH 3 )CH 2 -) and the like.
  • Alkaryl refers to -alkylene-aryl groups preferably having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms in the alkylene moiety and from 6 to 10 carbon atoms in the aryl moiety. Such alkaryl groups are exemplified by benzyl, phenethyl and the like.
  • Alkoxy refers to the group “alkyl-O-”. Preferred alkoxy groups include, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, iso-propoxy, 77-butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, n-hexoxy, 1,2-dimethylbutoxy, and the like.
  • Substituted alkoxy refers to the group “substituted alkyl-O-" where substituted alkyl is as defined above.
  • Alkylalkoxy refers to the group “-alkylene-O-alkyl” where alkylene and alkyl are as defined above.
  • groups include, by way of example, methylenemethoxy (-CH 2 OCH 3 ), ethylenemethoxy (-CH 2 CH 2 OCH 3 ), n-propylene- ⁇ O-propoxy (-CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 OCH(CH 3 ) 2 ) , methylene-tert-butoxy (-CH 2 -O-C(CH 3 ) 3 ) and the like.
  • Alkylthioalkoxy refers to the group “-alkylene-S-alkyl” where alkylene and alkyl are as defined above.
  • groups include, by way of example, methylenethio ethoxy (-CH 2 SCH 3 ), ethylenethiomethoxy (-CH 2 CH 2 SCH 3 ), n-propylene-wo-thiopropoxy (-CH 2 CH 2 CH 2 SCH(CH 3 ) 2 ), methylenethio-t - butoxy (-CH 2 SC(CH 3 ) 3 ) and the like.
  • alkenyl refers to alkenyl groups preferably having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-2 sites of alkenyl unsaturation.
  • Substituted alkenyl refers to an alkenyl group as defined above having from 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, cyano, cycloalkyl, oxy acylamino, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, nitro, and mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-cycloalkyl, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from alkyl, substituted alkyl,
  • Alkynyl refers to alkynyl groups preferably having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-2 sites of alkynyl unsaturation.
  • Preferred alkynyl groups include ethynyl (-C ⁇ CH), propargyl (-CH 2 C ⁇ CH) and the like.
  • Substituted alkynyl refers to an alkynyl group as defined above having from 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, cyano, cycloalkyl, oxyacylamino, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, nitro, and mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-cycloalkylamino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di- heteroarylamino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, and unsymmetric di- substituted amines having different substituents selected from alkyl, substituted alkyl, cyclo
  • Acyl refers to the groups alkyl-C(O)-, substituted alkyl-C(O)-, cycloalkyl-C(O)-, aryl-C(O)-, heteroaryl-C(O)- and heterocyclic-C(O)- where alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • Acylamino refers to the group -C(O)NRR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic and where each of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • Aminoacyl refers to the group -NRC(O)R where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic and where each of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • Alkyloxy refers to the groups -OC(O)-alkyl, -OC(O)-substituted alkyl, -OC(O)-cycloalkyl, -OC(O)-aryl, -C(O)O-heteroaryl-, and -C(O)O-heterocyclic where alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • Aminoacyloxy refers to the groups -NRC(O)O-alkyl, -NRC(O)O- substituted alkyl, -NRC(O)O-cycloalkyl, -NRC(O)O-aryl, -NRC(O)O- heteroaryl-, and -NRC(O)O-heterocyclic where R is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic and where each of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • Oxyacylamino refers to the groups -OC(O)NR-alkyl, -OC(O)NR- substituted alkyl, -OC(O)NR-aryl, -OC(O)NR-heteroaryl-, and -OC(O)NR- heterocyclic where R is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic and where each of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
  • Aryl refers to an unsaturated aromatic carbocyclic group of from 6 to 14 carbon atoms having a single ring (e.g., phenyl) or multiple condensed rings (e.g. , naphthyl or anthryl). Preferred aryls include phenyl, naphthyl and the like.
  • such aryl groups can optionally be substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, acyl, acyloxy, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, aminoacyl, acylamino, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, aryl, aryloxy, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, mono- and di- alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di- cycloalkylamino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono-and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di-hetero
  • Preferred substituents include alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, and thioalkoxy. When so substituted, such aryl groups are sometimes referred to herein as "substituted aryl".
  • Aryloxy refers to the group aryl-O- wherein the aryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups as also defined above.
  • Carboxyalkyl refers to the groups -C(O)O-alkyl
  • alkyl and substituted alkyl are as defined herein.
  • Cycloalkyl refers to cyclic alkyl groups of from 3 to 20 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring or multiple condensed rings (including aromatic rings fused to the cycloalkyl ring) which can be optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 alkyl groups.
  • Such cycloalkyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclooctyl, 1- methylcyclopropyl, 2-methylcyclopentyl, 2-methylcyclooctyl, and the like, or multiple ring structures such as dibenzosuberane, adamantanyl, and the like.
  • Cycloalkenyl refers to cyclic alkenyl groups of from 4 to 8 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring or multiple condensed rings and at least one point of internal unsaturation which can be optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 alkyl groups.
  • suitable cycloalkenyl groups include, for instance, cyclobut-2-enyl, cyclopent-3-enyl, cyclooct-3-enyl and the like.
  • Halo or halogen refers to fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo and preferably is either chloro or bromo.
  • Heteroaryl refers to a monovalent aromatic group of from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected from oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur within the ring.
  • heteroaryl groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, acyl, acyloxy, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, aminoacyl, acylamino, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, aryl, aryloxy, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, mono- and di- alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di- cycloalkylamino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono-and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di-heterocycl
  • heteroaryl groups can have a single ring (e.g., pyridyl, furyl, etc.) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., indolizinyl or benzothienyl).
  • Preferred heteroaryls include pyridyl, pyrrolyl, and furyl. When so substituted, such heteroaryl groups are sometimes referred to herein as "substituted heteroaryl".
  • Heterocycle or “heterocyclic” refers to a monovalent saturated or unsaturated group having a single ring or multiple condensed rings, from 1 to 12 carbon atoms and from 1 to 4 hetero atoms selected from nitrogen, sulfur or oxygen within the ring.
  • heterocyclic groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, acyl, acyloxy, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, aminoacyl, acylamino, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, aryl, aryloxy, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, mono- and di- alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono-and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted
  • heterocycles and heteroaryls include, but are not limited to, furan, thiophene, thiazole, oxazole, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthylpyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, phenanthroline, isothiazole, phenazine, isoxazole, phenoxazine, phenothiazine, imidazolidine, imidazoline, piperidine, piperazine, indoline, phthalimide,
  • Thiol refers to the group -SH.
  • Thioalkoxy refers to the group -S-alkyl.
  • Substituted thioalkoxy refers to the group -S-substituted alkyl.
  • Thioaryloxy refers to the group aryl-S- wherein the aryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups as also defined above.
  • Thioheteroaryloxy refers to the group heteroaryl-S- wherein the heteroaryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups as also defined above.
  • R b and R c can be fused to form a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring with the phenyl ring. Fusion in this manner results in a fused bicyclic ring structure of the formula:
  • R b' is as defined above and A is the fused heteroaryl or heterocyclic group as these terms are as defined above wherein the two atoms of the phenyl ring are included in the total atoms present in the heteroaryl or heterocyclic group.
  • fused ring systems include, for instance, indol-5-yl, indol-6-yl, thionaphthen-5-yl, thionaphthen-6-yl, isothionaphthen-5-yl, isothionaphthen-6-yl, indoxazin-5-yl, indoxazin-6-yl, benzoxazol-5-yl, benzoxazol-6-yl, anthranil-5-yl, anthranil-6-yl, quinolin-6-yl, quinolin-7-yl, isoquinolin-6-yl, isoquinolin-7-yl, cinnolin-6-yl, cinnolin-7-yl, quinazolin-6-yl, quinazolin-7-yl, benzofuran-5-yl, benzofuran-6-yl, isobenzofuran-5-yl, isobenzofuran-6-yl,
  • “Pharmaceutically acceptable salt” refers to pharmaceutically acceptable salts of a compound of Formula I which salts are derived from a variety of organic and inorganic counter ions well known in the art and include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium, and the like; and when the molecule contains a basic functionality, salts of organic or inorganic acids, such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, tartrate, mesylate, acetate, maleate, oxalate and the like.
  • the R 1 group of the amino acid NH 2 CH(R )COOH or an ester thereof is first introduced onto the molecule. Afterwards, conventional coupling of the first R 1 NHCH(R 2 )COOH or ester thereof with the amine of NH 2 CH(R 3 )C(O)Y provides for compounds of formula I wherein X is -C(O)Y.
  • R 1 and R 2 are as defined above and X' is preferably a halo group such as chloro or bromo.
  • leaving groups other than halo may be employed such as triflate, mesylate, tosylate and the like.
  • suitable esters of 1 may be employed in this reaction.
  • Reaction (1) involves coupling of a suitable haloacetic acid derivative 1 with a primary aryl/heteroarylamine 2 under conditions which provide for amino acid 3.
  • This reaction is described by, for example, Yates, et al. 10 and proceeds by combining approximately stoichiometric equivalents of haloacetic acid 1 with primary aryl/heteroarylamine 2 in a suitable inert diluent such as water, dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) and the like.
  • DMSO dimethylsulfoxide
  • the reaction employs an excess of a suitable base such as sodium bicarbonate, sodium hydroxide, etc. to scavenge the acid generated by the reaction.
  • reaction (1) is preferably conducted at from about 25 °C to about 100°C until reaction completion which typically occurs within 1 to about 24 hours. This reaction is further described in U.S. Patent No. 3,598,859, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
  • N-aryl/N-heteroaryl amino acid 3 is recovered by conventional methods including precipitation, chromatography, filtration and the like.
  • each of the reagents haloacetic acid 1, primary aryl/heteroarylamine 2 and alcohol 3
  • the R 1 group can be coupled to an alanine ester (or other suitable amino acid ester) by conventional N-arylation.
  • a stoichiometric equivalent or slight excess of the amino acid ester can be dissolved in a suitable diluent such as DMSO and coupled with a haloaryl compound, X-R 1 where X is a halo group such as fluoro, chloro or bromo and R 1 is as defined above.
  • the reaction is conducted in the presence of an excess of base such as sodium hydroxide to scavenge the acid generated by the reaction.
  • the reaction typically proceeds at from 15 °C to about 250°C and is complete in about 1 to 24 hours.
  • N-aryl amino acid ester is recovered by conventional methods including chromatography, filtration and the like.
  • esterified amino acids of formula I above can be prepared by reductive amination of a suitable 2- oxocarboxylic acid ester (such as a pyruvate ester) in the manner illustrated in Reaction (2) below:
  • R 1 and R 2 are as defined above.
  • reaction (2) approximately stoichiometric equivalents of a 2- oxocarboxylic acid ester 6 and arylamine 2 are combined in an inert diluent such as methanol, ethanol and the like and the reaction solution treated under conditions which provide for imine formation (not shown).
  • the imine formed is then reduced under conventional conditions by a suitable reducing agent such as sodium cyanoborohydride, H 2 /palladium on carbon and the like to form the N-aryl amino acid ester 5.
  • the reducing agent is H 2 /palladium on carbon which is incorporated into the initial reaction medium which permits imine reduction in situ in a one pot procedure to provide for the N-aryl amino acid ester 5.
  • reaction is preferably conducted at from about 20°C to about 80°C at a pressure of from 1 to 10 atmospheres until reaction completion which typically occurs within 1 to about 24 hours.
  • N-aryl amino acid ester 5 is recovered by conventional methods including chromatography, filtration and the like.
  • a further embodiment for preparing N-aryl amino acids includes aromatic nucleophilic substitution of fluorobenzenes by the amine group of an amino acid.
  • the carboxylic acid derivative 5 is then coupled under conventional conditions well known in the art with a compound of the formula NH 2 CH(R 3 )C(O)Y where R 3 and Y are as defined above. Such coupling leads to compounds of formula I. Subsequent modifications (e.g., reduction) lead to further compounds of formula I.
  • Y is an ester group
  • conventional transesterification techniques can be used to prepare a variety of different ester groups on the compounds of formula I.
  • Numerous techniques are known in the art to effect transesterification and each technique merely replaces the ester group with a different ester group derived from the corresponding alcohol or thioalcohol and, in some cases, a catalyst such as titanium (IV) w ⁇ -propoxide is used to facilitate reaction completion.
  • the alcohol or thioalcohol is first treated with sodium hydride in a suitable diluent such as toluene to form the corresponding sodium alkoxide or thioalkoxide which is then employed to effect transesterification.
  • a suitable diluent such as toluene
  • the efficiency of this technique makes it particularly useful with high boiling and/or expensive alcohols.
  • the ester to be transesterified is placed in a large excess of the alcohol or thioalcohol which effects transesterification.
  • a catalytic amount of sodium hydride is then added and the reaction proceeds quickly under conventional conditions to provide the desired transesterified product. Because this protocol requires the use of a large excess of alcohol or thioalcohol, this procedure is particularly useful when the alcohol is inexpensive.
  • Transesterification provides a facile means to provide for a multiplicity of different ester substituents on the compounds of formula I above.
  • the alcohols and thioalcohols employed to effect transesterification are well known in the art with a significant number being commercially available.
  • esters of this invention include, by way of example, first hydrolyzing the ester to the free acid followed by O-alkylation with, e.g. , a haloalkyl group in the presence of a base such as potassium carbonate.
  • reaction is conventionally conducted in an inert aprotic diluent such as dimethylformamide, dichloromethane, chloroform, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran and the like.
  • an inert aprotic diluent such as dimethylformamide, dichloromethane, chloroform, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran and the like.
  • ketones can be prepared by coupling the suitable aminoketone ⁇ Cl salt with the terminal carboxyl group of the amino acid.
  • the starting materials can contain a chiral center (e.g., alanine) and, when a racemic starting material is employed, the resulting product is a mixture of diastereomers or R,S enantiomers.
  • a chiral isomer of the starting material can be employed and, if the reaction protocol employed does not racemize this starting material, a chiral product is obtained.
  • Such reaction protocols can involve inversion of the chiral center during synthesis.
  • the products of this invention are a mixture of diastereomers (if two or more chiral centers are present) or
  • R,S enantiomers (if only one chiral center is present).
  • the chiral product corresponds to the L-amino acid derivative.
  • chiral products can be obtained via purification techniques which separates diastereomers or enantiomers from a R,S mixture to provide for one or the other stereoisomer. Such techniques are well known in the art.
  • the compounds of formula I are usually administered in the form of pharmaceutical compositions. These compounds can be administered by a variety of routes including oral, rectal, transdermal, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, and intranasal. These compounds are effective as both injectable and oral compositions. Such compositions are prepared in a manner well known in the pharmaceutical art and comprise at least one active compound.
  • compositions which contain, as the active ingredient, one or more of the compounds of formula I above associated with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
  • the active ingredient is usually mixed with an excipient, diluted by an excipient or enclosed within such a carrier which can be in the form of a capsule, sachet, paper or other container.
  • the excipient serves as a diluent, it can be a solid, semi-solid, or liquid material, which acts as a vehicle, carrier or medium for the active ingredient.
  • compositions can be in the form of tablets, pills, powders, lozenges, sachets, cachets, elixirs, suspensions, emulsions, solutions, syrups, aerosols (as a solid or in a liquid medium), ointments containing, for example, up to 10% by weight of the active compound, soft and hard gelatin capsules, suppositories, sterile injectable solutions, and sterile packaged powders.
  • the active compound In preparing a formulation, it may be necessary to mill the active compound to provide the appropriate particle size prior to combining with the other ingredients. If the active compound is substantially insoluble, it ordinarily is milled to a particle size of less than 200 mesh. If the active compound is substantially water soluble, the particle size is normally adjusted by milling to provide a substantially uniform distribution in the formulation, e.g. about 40 mesh.
  • excipients include lactose, dextrose, sucrose, sorbitol, mannitol, starches, gum acacia, calcium phosphate, alginates, tragacanth, gelatin, calcium silicate, microcrystalline cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, cellulose, sterile water, syrup, and methyl cellulose.
  • the formulations can additionally include: lubricating agents such as talc, magnesium stearate, and mineral oil; wetting agents; emulsifying and suspending agents; preserving agents such as methyl- and propylhydroxy- benzoates; sweetening agents; and flavoring agents.
  • the compositions of the invention can be formulated so as to provide quick, sustained or delayed release of the active ingredient after administration to the patient by employing procedures known in the art.
  • compositions are preferably formulated in a unit dosage form, each dosage containing from about 5 to about 100 mg, more usually about 10 to about 30 mg, of the active ingredient.
  • unit dosage forms refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient.
  • the compound of formula I above is employed at no more than about 20 weight percent of the pharmaceutical composition, more preferably no more than about 15 weight percent, with the balance being pharmaceutically inert carrier(s).
  • the active compound is effective over a wide dosage range and is generally administered in a pharmaceutically effective amount. It, will be understood, however, that the amount of the compound actually administered will be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound administered, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like.
  • the principal active ingredient is mixed with a pharmaceutical excipient to form a solid preformulation composition containing a homogeneous mixture of a compound of the present invention.
  • a solid preformulation composition containing a homogeneous mixture of a compound of the present invention.
  • the active ingredient is dispersed evenly throughout the composition so that the composition may be readily subdivided into equally effective unit dosage forms such as tablets, pills and capsules.
  • This solid preformulation is then subdivided into unit dosage forms of the type described above containing from, for example, 0.1 to about 500 mg of the active ingredient of the present invention.
  • the tablets or pills of the present invention may be coated or otherwise compounded to provide a dosage form affording the advantage of prolonged action.
  • the tablet or pill can comprise an inner dosage and an outer dosage component, the latter being in the form of an envelope over the former.
  • the two components can be separated by an enteric layer which serves to resist disintegration in the stomach and permit the inner component to pass intact into the duodenum or to be delayed in release.
  • enteric layers or coatings such materials including a number of polymeric acids and mixtures of polymeric acids with such materials as shellac, cetyl alcohol, and cellulose acetate.
  • liquid forms in which the novel compositions of the present invention may be incorporated for administration orally or by injection include aqueous solutions, suitably flavored syrups, aqueous or oil suspensions, and flavored emulsions with edible oils such as corn oil, cottonseed oil, sesame oil, coconut oil, or peanut oil, as well as elixirs and similar pharmaceutical vehicles.
  • compositions for inhalation or insufflation include solutions and suspensions in pharmaceutically acceptable, aqueous or organic solvents, or mixtures thereof, and powders.
  • the liquid or solid compositions may contain suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients as described supra.
  • the compositions are administered by the oral or nasal respiratory route for local or systemic effect.
  • Compositions in preferably pharmaceutically acceptable solvents may be nebulized by use of inert gases. Nebulized solutions may be inhaled directly from the nebulizing device or the nebulizing device may be attached to a face mask tent, or intermittent positive pressure breathing machine. Solution, suspension, or powder compositions may be administered, preferably orally or nasally, from devices which deliver the formulation in an appropriate manner.
  • the above ingredients are mixed and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 340 mg quantities.
  • the components are blended and compressed to form tablets, each weighing 240 mg.
  • Formulation Example 3 A dry powder inhaler formulation is prepared containing the following components:
  • the active ingredient, starch and cellulose are passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve and mixed thoroughly.
  • the solution of polyvinylpyrrolidone is mixed with the resultant powders, which are then passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve.
  • the granules so produced are dried at 50° to 60 °C and passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve.
  • the sodium carboxymethyl starch, magnesium stearate, and talc previously passed through a No. 30 mesh U.S. sieve, are then added to the granules which, after mixing, are compressed on a tablet machine to yield tablets each weighing 120 mg.
  • Suppositories each containing 25 mg of active ingredient are made as follows:
  • the active ingredient is passed through a No. 60 mesh U.S. sieve and suspended in the saturated fatty acid glycerides previously melted using the minimum heat necessary. The mixture is then poured into a suppository mold of nominal 2.0 g capacity and allowed to cool.
  • the active ingredient, sucrose and xanthan gum are blended, passed through a No. 10 mesh U.S. sieve, and then mixed with a previously made solution of the microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose in water.
  • the sodium benzoate, flavor, and color are diluted with some of the water and added with stirring. Sufficient water is then added to produce the required volume.
  • the active ingredient, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in
  • a subcutaneous formulation may be prepared as follows: Ingredient Quantity
  • a topical formulation may be prepared as follows:
  • the white soft paraffin is heated until molten.
  • the liquid paraffin and emulsifying wax are incorporated and stirred until dissolved.
  • the active ingredient is added and stirring is continued until dispersed.
  • the mixture is then cooled until solid.
  • transdermal delivery devices Such transdermal patches may be used to provide continuous or discontinuous infusion of the compounds of the present invention in controlled amounts.
  • transdermal patches for the delivery of pharmaceutical agents is well known in the art. See, e.g.. U.S. Patent 5,023,252, issued June 11, 1991, herein incorporated by reference.
  • patches may be constructed for continuous, pulsatile, or on demand delivery of pharmaceutical agents.
  • Indirect techniques usually involve formulating the compositions to provide for drug latentiation by the conversion of hydrophihc drugs into lipid-soluble drugs.
  • Latentiation is generally achieved through blocking of the hydroxy, carbonyl, sulfate, and primary amine groups present on the drug to render the drug more lipid soluble and amenable to transportation across the blood-brain barrier.
  • the delivery of hydrophihc drugs may be enhanced by intra-arterial infusion of hypertonic solutions which can transiently open the blood-brain barrier.
  • Other suitable formulations for use in the present invention can be found in Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mace Publishing Company, Philadelphia, PA, 17th ed. (1985).
  • the compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of the invention are useful in inhibiting /3-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis, and, accordingly, have utility in treating Alzheimer's disease in mammals including humans.
  • the compounds described herein are suitable for use in a variety of drug delivery systems described above. Additionally, in order to enhance the in vivo serum half-life of the administered compound, the compounds may be encapsulated, introduced into the lumen of liposomes, prepared as a colloid, or other conventional techniques may be employed which provide an extended serum half-life of the compounds.
  • a variety of methods are available for preparing liposomes, as described in, e.g., Szoka, et al., U.S. Patent Nos. 4,235,871, 4,501 ,728 and 4,837,028 each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
  • compositions are administered to a patient already suffering from AD in an amount sufficient to at least partially arrest further onset of the symptoms of the disease and its complications.
  • An amount adequate to accomplish this is defined as "therapeutically effective dose.
  • Amounts effective for this use will depend on the judgment of the attending clinician depending upon factors such as the degree or severity of AD in the patient, the age, weight and general condition of the patient, and the like.
  • the compounds described herein are administered at dosages ranging from about 0.1 to about 500 mg/kg/day.
  • compositions are administered to a patient at risk of developing AD (determined for example by genetic screening or familial trait) in an amount sufficient to inhibit the onset of symptoms of the disease.
  • An amount adequate to accomplish this is defined as "prophylactically effective dose. " Amounts effective for this use will depend on the judgment of the attending clinician depending upon factors such as the age, weight and general condition of the patient, and the like.
  • the compounds described herein are administered at dosages ranging from about 0.1 to about 500 mg/kg/day.
  • the compounds administered to a patient are in the form of pharmaceutical compositions described above. These compositions may be sterilized by conventional sterilization techniques, or may be sterile filtered. When aqueous solutions are employed, these may be packaged for use as is, or lyophilized, the lyophilized preparation being combined with a sterile aqueous carrier prior to administration.
  • the pH of the compound preparations typically will be between 3 and 11 , more preferably from 5 to 9 and most preferably from 7 and 8. It will be understood that use of certain of the foregoing excipients, carriers, or stabilizers will result in the formation of pharmaceutical salts.
  • EDC l-(3-dimethyaminopropyl)-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride
  • OD optical density
  • pg picograms
  • pM picomolar
  • psi pounds per square inch
  • rpm rotations per minute
  • rt room temperature
  • ⁇ g microgram
  • ⁇ L microliter
  • Aldrich indicates that the compound or reagent used in the following procedures is commercially available from Aldrich Chemical Company, Inc. , 1001 West Saint Paul Avenue, Milwaukee, WI 53233 USA; the term “Bachem” indicates the compound or reagent is commercially available from Bachem Biosciences Inc. , 3700 Horizon Drive, Renaissance at Gulph Mills, King of Prussia, PA 19406 USA; the term “Fluka” indicates the compound or reagent is commercially available from Fluka Chemical Corp., 980 South 2nd Street, Ronkonkoma, NY 11779 USA; the term “Lancaster” indicates the compound or reagent is commercially available from Lancaster
  • GENERAL PROCEDURE C Ester Hydrolysis to Free Acid Ester hydrolysis to the free acid was conducted by conventional methods. Below are two examples of such conventional de-esterification methods.
  • the amino acid ester was dissolved in dioxane/water (4: 1) to which was added LiOH ( - 2 eq.) that was dissolved in water such that the total solvent after addition was about 2: 1 dioxane: water.
  • the reaction mixture was stirred until reaction completion and the dioxane was removed under reduced pressure.
  • the residue was diluted with EtOAc, the layers were separated and the aqueous layer acidified to pH 2.
  • the aqueous layer was back extracted with EtOAc, the combined organics were dried over Na 2 SO 4 and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure after filtration.
  • the residue was purified by conventional methods (e.g. , recrystallization).
  • the carboxylic acid was dissolved in methylene chloride.
  • the amino acid ester/amide (1 eq.), N-mefhylmorpholine (5 eq.) and hydroxybenzotriazole monohydrate (1.2 eq.) were added in sequence.
  • a cooling bath was applied to the round bottomed flask until the solution reached 0°C.
  • 1.2 eq. of l-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (EDC) was added.
  • the solution was allowed to stir overnight and come to room temperature under nitrogen pressure.
  • the reaction mixture was worked up by washing the organic phase with saturated aqueous sodium carbonate, 0. IM citric acid, and brine before drying with sodium sulfate.
  • the solvents were then removed to yield crude product. Pure products were obtained by flash chromatography in an appropriate solvent.
  • the reaction was cooled to room temperature, then the pH was adjusted to ⁇ 4.
  • the precipitated mono-nosylated aminoquinoline was removed by filtration and washed with H 2 O.
  • a solution of this compound in THF was then added to a -78 °C suspension of NaH in THF, then ethyl 2- bromopropionate was added.
  • the reaction was warmed to it, then refluxed for 4 days.
  • the crude reaction mixture was stripped free of solvent on a rotary evaporator, and the alkylated, nosylated aminoquinoline was obtained by chromatography. This product was then dissolved in DMF and 3 equivalents K 2 CO 3 was added, followed by 1.2 equivalents of thiophenol. The reaction was stirred overnight at room temperature.
  • the reaction was then quenched with water and ether, and the organic phase was washed with saturated aqueous NaHCO 3 and saturated aqueous NaCl, then dried over MgSO 4 .
  • the solution was stripped free of solvent on a rotary evaporator to yield the crude product, which was then purified through chromatography.
  • reaction volume was reduced to — 1/3 of initial volume under reduced pressure.
  • aqueous potassium sodium tartrate 20% aqueous potassium sodium tartrate
  • amino acid (amino acid or amino acid hydrochloride) is suspended in methanol and chilled to 0°C. HCI gas is bubbled through this solution for 5 min. The reaction is allowed to warm to room temperature then stirred for 4 hours. The solvents are then removed to afford the desired amino acid methyl ester hydrochloride. This product is usually used without further purification.
  • N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine was prepared. Specifically, to a solution of 3,4- dichloroaniline (1 equivalent) (Aldrich) in isopropanol (about 500 mL per mole of 3,4-dichloroaniline) is added water (about 0.06 mL per mL of isopropanol) and 2-chloropropionic acid (2 equivalents) (Aldrich).
  • Example B Synthesis of N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine Using the procedure set forth in U.S. Patent No. 3,598,859 (or Example A above), N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine was prepared using 3,5- dichloroaniline (Aldrich) and 2-chloropropionic acid (Aldrich).
  • N-(3,5-difluorophenyl)-D,L-alanine was prepared using 3,5- difluoroaniline (Aldrich) and 2-chloropropionic acid (Aldrich).
  • Example F Synthesis of BOC- ⁇ orleucine amide
  • BOC-norleucine BOC-norleucine (Bachem)
  • 3.44 g (22.5 mmol) of 1-hydroxybenzotriazole monohydrate and 50 mL of dichloromethane at 0°C 3.45 g (1.2 mmol) of EDC.
  • the resulting mixture was stirred at 0°C for 1 hour and then ammonia gas was bubbled through the mixture for 10 min.
  • the cooling bath was allowed to warm to room temperature and the mixture stirred for 18 hours.
  • the mixture was evaporated to dryness, triturated with 20% Na 2 CO 3 .
  • the resulting solid was collected by filtration and washed with water to yield 2.69 g (11.7 mmol, 78%) of the title compound.
  • Step B N-[3,5-Di(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-L-alanine isobutyl ester was then hydrolyzed according to General Procedure C using lithium hydroxide in THF.
  • N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)glycine was prepared using 3,4-dichloroaniline (Aldrich) and 2- chloroacetic acid (Aldrich).
  • reaction product was purified by silica gel chromatography using 50% ethyl acetate/hexane.
  • Step A Synthesis of N-[N-benzothiazoI-6-yl)-D,L-alanine
  • a solution of 1 gram of 6-aminobenzothiazole (Lancaster) in 60 mL of dichloromethane was treated with 0.63 grams of pyridine and then 2.1 grams of trifluoroacetic acid anhydride at room temperature. The reaction was stirred for 3 hours during which time the initially warm reaction mixture cooled to room temperature. The mixture was washed with a 5 % aqueous citric acid solution, dried with MgS0 4 and the solvents removed to provide a quantitative yield of 6-aminobenzotriazole trifluoroacetamide as a cream colored solid that was used immediately in the following reaction.
  • Step B Synthesis of N-[N-benzothiazol-6-yl)-D,L-alanyl]-(S)-2- aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
  • ⁇ -nmr (CD 3 OD) ⁇ 6.49 (m, IH), 6.32 (m, IH), 1.14 (m, IH), 3.54- 3.71 (m, IH), 0.80-1.62 (m, 9H), 0.68 (m, 1.5H), 0.58 (m, 1.5H).
  • Example 61 Cellular Screen for the Detection of Inhibitors of ⁇ -Amyloid Production
  • Numerous compounds of formula I above were assayed for their ability to inhibit / 3-amyloid production in a cell line possessing the Swedish mutation.
  • the media were again removed and replaced with fresh drug containing media as above and cells were incubated for an additional two hours.
  • plates were centrifuged in a Beckman GPR at 1200 rpm for five minutes at room temperature to pellet cellular debris from the conditioned media. From each well, 100 ⁇ L of conditioned media or appropriate dilutions thereof were transferred into an
  • ELISA plate precoated with antibody 266 [P. Seubert, Nature (1992) 359:325- 327] against amino acids 13-28 of /3-amyloid peptide as described in International Patent Application Publication No. 94/10569 8 and stored at 4°C overnight.
  • An ELISA assay employing labelled antibody 6C6 [P. Seubert, Nature (1992) 359:325-327] against amino acids 1-16 of /3-amyloid peptide was run the next day to measure the amount of /3-amyloid peptide produced.
  • Cytotoxic effects of the compounds were measured by a modification of the method of Hansen, et al. 12 .
  • To the cells remaining in the tissue culture plate was added 25 ⁇ L of a 3-(4,5-dimethylthiazol-2-yl)-2,5-diphenyltetrazolium bromide (MTT) (Sigma, St. Louis, MO) stock solution (5 mg/mL) to a final concentration of 1 mg/mL.
  • MTT 3-(4,5-dimethylthiazol-2-yl)-2,5-diphenyltetrazolium bromide
  • results of the /3-amyloid peptide ELISA were fit to a standard curve and expressed as ng/mL /3-amyloid peptide. In order to normalize for cytotoxicity, these results were divided by the MTT results and expressed as a percentage of the results from a drug free control. All results are the mean and standard deviation of at least six replicate assays.
  • test compounds were assayed for /3-amyloid peptide production inhibition activity in cells using this assay.
  • the results of this assay demonstrate that, each of the compounds of Examples 1-60 inhibit the ⁇ - amyloid peptide production by at least 30% as compared to control.
  • This example illustrates how the compounds of this invention could be tested for in vivo suppression of /3-amyloid release and/or synthesis.
  • 3 to 4 month old PDAPP mice are used [Games et al. , (1995) Nature 373:523-527].
  • the compound is usually formulated at either 5 or 10 mg/mL. Because of the low solubility factors of the compounds, they may be formulated with various vehicles, such as corn oil (Safeway, South San Francisco, CA); 10% ethanol in corn oil; 2-hydroxypropyl-/3-cyclodextrin (Research Biochemicals International, Natick MA); and carboxymethylcellulose (Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis MO).
  • mice are dosed subcutaneously with a 26 gauge needle and 3 hours later the animals are euthanized via CO 2 narcosis and blood is taken by cardiac puncture using a 1 cc 25G 5/8" tuberculin syringe/needle coated with solution of 0.5 M EDTA, pH 8.0.
  • the blood is placed in a Becton-Dickinson vacutainer tube containing EDTA and spun down for 15 minutes at 1500 x gravity at 5°C.
  • the brains of the mice are then removed and the cortex and hippocampus are dissected out and placed on ice.
  • each brain region is homogenized in 10 volumes of ice cold guanidine buffer (5.0 M guanidine-HCl, 50 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0) using a Kontes motorized pestle (Fisher, Pittsburgh PA). The homogenates are gently rocked on a rotating platform for three to four hours at room temperature and stored at -20 °C prior to quantitation of /3-amyloid.
  • the brain homogenates are diluted 1: 10 with ice-cold casein buffer [0.25% casein, phosphate buffered saline (PBS), 0.05% sodium azide, 20 ⁇ g/mL aprotinin, 5 mM EDTA, pH 8.0, 10 ⁇ g/mL leupeptin], thereby reducing the final concentration of guanidine to 0.5 M, before centrifugation at 16,000 x gravity for 20 minutes at 4°C.
  • PBS phosphate buffered saline
  • the /3-amyloid standards (1-40 or 1-42 amino acids) were prepared such that the final composition equaled 0.5 M guanidine in the presence of 0.1 % bovine serum albumin (BSA).
  • the total /3-amyloid sandwich ELISA, quantitating both /3-amyloid (aa 1- 40) and / 3-amyloid (aa 1-42) consists of two monoclonal antibodies (mAb) to ⁇ - amyloid.
  • the capture antibody, 266 [P. Seubert, Nature (1992) 359:325-327], is specific to amino acids 13 - 28 of 3-amyloid.
  • the antibody 3D6 [Johnson- Wood et al., PNAS USA (1997) 94: 1550-1555], which is specific to amino acids 1 - 5 of /3-amyloid, is biotinylated and served as the reporter antibody in the assay.
  • the 3D6 biotinylation procedure employs the manufacturer's (Pierce,
  • the assay has a lower limit of sensitivity of - 50 pg/mL (11 pM) and shows no cross- reactivity to the endogenous murine /3-amyloid peptide at concentrations up to 1 ng/mL.
  • the configuration of the sandwich ELISA quantitating the level of ⁇ - amyloid (aa 1-42) employs the mAb 2 IF 12 [Johnson-Wood et al., PNAS USA
  • Biotinylated 3D6 is also the reporter antibody in this assay which has a lower limit of sensitivity of - 125 pg/mL (28 pM).
  • the 266 and 21F12 capture mAbs are coated at 10 ⁇ g/mL into 96 well immunoassay plates (Costar, Cambidge MA) overnight at room temperature.
  • the plates are then aspirated and blocked with 0.25 % human serum albumin in PBS buffer for at least 1 hour at room temperature, then stored desiccated at 4°C until use.
  • the plates are rehydrated with wash buffer (Tris-buffered saline, 0.05% Tween 20) prior to use.
  • the samples and standards are added to the plates and incubated overnight at 4°C.
  • the plates are washed > 3 times with wash buffer between each step of the assay.
  • the biotinylated 3D6, diluted to 0.5 ⁇ g/mL in casein incubation buffer (0.25% casein, PBS, 0.05 % Tween 20, pH 7.4) is incubated in the well for 1 hour at room temperature.
  • Avidin- HRP Vector, Burlingame CA
  • diluted 1:4000 in casein incubation buffer is added to the wells for 1 hour at room temperature.
  • the colorimetric substrate
  • the EDTA plasma is diluted 1 : 1 in specimen diluent (0.2 g/L sodium phosphate H 2 O (monobasic), 2.16 g/L sodium phosphate* 7H 2 O (dibasic), 0.5 g/L thimerosal, 8.5 g/L sodium chloride, 0.5 mL Triton X-405, 6.0 g/L globulin-free bovine serum albumin; and water).
  • the samples and standards in specimen diluent are assayed using the total /3-amyloid assay (266 capture/3D6 reporter) described above for the brain assay except the specimen diluent was used instead of the casein diluents described.
  • Gly Ala lie lie Gly Leu Met Val Gly Gly Val Val lie Ala 30 35 40

Abstract

Disclosed are compounds which inhibit β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis, and, accordingly, have utility in treating Alzheimer's disease. Also disclosed are pharmaceutical compositions comprising a compound which inhibits β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis as well as methods for treating Alzheimer's disease both prophylactically and therapeutically with such pharmaceutical compositions.

Description

N-(ARYL/HETEROARYL) AMINO ACID DERIVATIVES,
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING SAME, AND
METHODS FOR INHIBITING 3-AMYLOID PEPTIDE RELEASE AND/OR ITS
SYNTHESIS BY USE OF SUCH COMPOUNDS
CROSS-REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS
This application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Application No.
60/ , which was converted pursuant to 37 C.F.R. § 1.53(b)(2)(ii) from U.S.
Patent Application No. 08/755,334, filed November 22, 1996, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Field of the Invention
This invention relates to compounds which inhibit 0-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis, and, accordingly, have utility in treating Alzheimer's disease. This invention also relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising such compounds as well as methods for inhibiting release of β -amyloid peptide.
References
The following publications, patents and patent applications are cited in this application as superscript numbers:
1 Glenner, et al., "Alzheimer's Disease: Initial Report of the Purification and Characterization of a Novel Cerebrovascular Amyloid Protein" ,
Biochem. Biophys. Res. Commun. , 120:885-890 (1984).
2 Glenner, et al. , "Polypeptide Marker for Alzheimer's Disease and its Use for Diagnosis", U.S. Patent No. 4,666,829 issued May 19, 1987. 3 Selkoe, "The Molecular Pathology of Alzheimer's Disease", Neuron, 6:487-498 (1991).
4 Goate, et al. , "Segregation of a Missense Mutation in the Amyloid Precursor Protein Gene with Familial Alzheimer's
Disease", Nature, 249:704-706 (1990).
5 Chartier-Harlan, et al., "Early-Onset Alzheimer's Disease Caused by Mutations at Codon 717 of the β- Amyloid Precursor Protein Gene", Nature, 353:844-846 (1989).
6 Murrell, et al. , "A Mutation in the Amyloid Precursor Protein Associated with Hereditary Alzheimer's Disease", Science, 254:97-99 (1991).
7 Mullan, et al. , "A Pathogenic Mutation for Probable Alzheimer's Disease in the APP Gene at the N-Terminus of -Amyloid, Nature Genet. , 1:345-347 (1992). 8 Schenk, et al. , "Methods and Compositions for the Detection of
Soluble β- Amyloid Peptide", International Patent Application Publication No. WO 94/10569, published 11 May 1994.
9 Selkoe, "Amyloid Protein and Alzheimer's Disease", Scientific American, pp. 2-8, November, 1991.
10 Yates, et al., "N,N-Disubstituted Amino Acid Herbicides", U.S. Patent No. 3,598,859, issued August 10, 1971. n Citron, et al., "Mutation of the jS-Amyloid Precursor Protein in
Familial Alzheimer's Disease Increases -Protein Production, Nature, 360:672-674 (1992).
12 Hansen, et al., "Reexamination and Further Development of a Precise and Rapid Dye Method for Measuring Cell Growth/Cell
Kill", J. Immun. Meth. , 119:203-210 (1989).
All of the above publications, patents and patent applications are herein incorporated by reference in their entirety to the same extent as if each individual publication, patent or patent application was specifically and individually indicated to be incorporated by reference in its entirety. State of the Art
Alzheimer's Disease (AD) is a degenerative brain disorder characterized clinically by progressive loss of memory, cognition, reasoning, judgment and emotional stability that gradually leads to profound mental deterioration and ultimately death. AD is a very common cause of progressive mental failure
(dementia) in aged humans and is believed to represent the fourth most common medical cause of death in the United States. AD has been observed in races and ethnic groups worldwide and presents a major present and future public health problem. The disease is currently estimated to affect about two to three million individuals in the United States alone. AD is at present incurable. No treatment that effectively prevents AD or reverses its symptoms and course is currently known.
The brains of individuals with AD exhibit characteristic lesions termed senile (or amyloid) plaques, amyloid angiopathy (amyloid deposits in blood vessels) and neurofibrillary tangles. Large numbers of these lesions, particularly amyloid plaques and neurofibrillary tangles, are generally found in several areas of the human brain important for memory and cognitive function in patients with AD. Smaller numbers of these lesions in a more restrictive anatomical distribution are also found in the brains of most aged humans who do not have clinical AD. Amyloid plaques and amyloid angiopathy also characterize the brains of individuals with Trisomy 21 (Down's Syndrome) and Hereditary Cerebral Hemorrhage with Amyloidosis of the Dutch Type (HCHWA-D). At present, a definitive diagnosis of AD usually requires observing the aforementioned lesions in the brain tissue of patients who have died with the disease or, rarely, in small biopsied samples of brain tissue taken during an invasive neurosurgical procedure.
The principal chemical constituent of the amyloid plaques and vascular amyloid deposits (amyloid angiopathy) characteristic of AD and the other disorders mentioned above is an approximately 4.2 kilodalton (kD) protein of about 39-43 amino acids designated the /3-amyloid peptide (/SAP) or sometimes Aβ, A3P or /3/A4. β- Amyloid peptide was first purified and a partial amino acid sequence was provided by Glenner, et al.1 The isolation procedure and the sequence data for the first 28 amino acids are described in U.S. Patent No. 4,666,8292.
Molecular biological and protein chemical analyses have shown that the /3-amyloid peptide is a small fragment of a much larger precursor protein (APP), that is normally produced by cells in many tissues of various animals, including humans. Knowledge of the structure of the gene encoding the APP has demonstrated that /3-amyloid peptide arises as a peptide fragment that is cleaved from APP by protease enzyme(s). The precise biochemical mechanism by which the /3-amyloid peptide fragment is cleaved from APP and subsequently deposited as amyloid plaques in the cerebral tissue and in the walls of the cerebral and meningeal blood vessels is currently unknown.
Several lines of evidence indicate that progressive cerebral deposition of /3-amyloid peptide plays a seminal role in the pathogenesis of AD and can precede cognitive symptoms by years or decades. See, for example, Selkoe3. The most important line of evidence is the discovery that missense DNA mutations at amino acid 717 of the 770-amino acid isoform of APP can be found in affected members but not unaffected members of several families with a genetically determined (familial) form of AD (Goate, et al.4; Chartier Harlan, et al.5; and Murrell, et al.6) and is referred to as the Swedish variant. A double mutation changing lysine595-methionine596 to asparagine595-leucine596 (with reference to the 695 isoform) found in a Swedish family was reported in 1992 (Mullan, et al.7). Genetic linkage analyses have demonstrated that these mutations, as well as certain other mutations in the APP gene, are the specific molecular cause of AD in the affected members of such families. In addition, a mutation at amino acid 693 of the 770-amino acid isoform of APP has been identified as the cause of the /3-amyloid peptide deposition disease, HCHWA-D, and a change from alanine to glycine at amino acid 692 appears to cause a phenotype that resembles AD is some patients but HCHWA-D in others. The discovery of these and other mutations in APP in genetically based cases of AD prove that alteration of APP and subsequent deposition of its J-amyloid peptide fragment can cause AD.
Despite the progress which has been made in understanding the underlying mechanisms of AD and other /3-amyloid peptide related diseases, there remains a need to develop methods and compositions for treatment of the disease(s). Ideally, the treatment methods would advantageously be based on drugs which are capable of inhibiting /3-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
This invention is directed to the discovery of a class of compounds which inhibit 3-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis and, therefore, are useful in the prevention of AD in patients susceptible to AD and/or in the treatment of patients with AD in order to inhibit further deterioration in their condition. The class of compounds having the described properties are defined by formula I below:
Figure imgf000007_0001
wherein:
R1 is selected from the group consisting of (a) phenyl, (b) a substituted phenyl group of formula II:
Figure imgf000008_0001
wherein Rc is selected from the group consisting of acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, azido, cyano, halo, hydrogen, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, and wherein Rb and Rc are fused to form a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring with the phenyl ring,
Rb and Rb' are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, alkoxy, and thioalkoxy with the proviso that when Rc is hydrogen, then Rb and Rb' are either both hydrogen or both substituents other than hydrogen,
(c) 2-naphthyl,
(d) 2-naphthyl substituted at the 4, 5, 6, 7 and/or 8 positions with 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, aryl, and heteroaryl,
(e) heteroaryl, and
(f) substituted heteroaryl containing 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, thioalkoxy and thioaryloxy provided that said substituents are not ortho (adjacent) to the heteroaryl attachment to the -NH group;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylthioalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl and substituted heteroaryl provided that the substituents are not ortho (adjacent) to the attachment of the aryl or heteroaryl atom to the carbon atom; R3 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, and heterocyclic;
X is -C(O)Y where Y is selected from the group consisting of (a) alkyl,
(b) substituted alkyl with the proviso that the substitution on said substituted alkyl does not include α-haloalkyl, α-diazoalkyl or α-OC(O)alkyl groups,
(c) alkoxy or thioalkoxy, (d) substituted alkoxy or substituted thioalkoxy,
(e) hydroxy, (f) aryl, (g) heteroaryl, (h) heterocyclic, (i) -NR'R" where R' and R" are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and where R' and R" are joined to form a cyclic group having from 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally containing 1 to 2 additional heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen and optionally substituted with one or more alkyl or alkoxy groups, and when R3 contains at least 3 carbon atoms, X can also be -CR4R4Y' where each R4 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic and Y' is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, thiol, -OC(O)R5, -SSR5, -SSC(O)R5 where R5 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic, and with the proviso that when R1 is 3,4-dichlorophenyl, R2 is methyl, and R3 is benzyl derived from D-phenylalanine, then X is not -C(O)OCH3.
Accordingly, in one of its method aspects, this invention is directed to a method for inhibiting /3-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis in a cell which method comprises administering to such a cell an amount of a compound or a mixture of compounds of formula I above effective in inhibiting the cellular release and/or synthesis of /3-amyloid peptide.
Because the in vivo generation of /3-amyloid peptide is associated with the pathogenesis of AD8'9, the compounds of formula I can also be employed in conjunction with a pharmaceutical composition to prophylactically and/or therapeutically prevent and/or treat AD. Accordingly, in another of its method aspects, this invention is directed to a prophylactic method for preventing the onset of AD in a patient at risk for developing AD which method comprises administering to said patient a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically inert carrier and an effective amount of a compound or a mixture of compounds of formula I above.
In yet another of its method aspects, this invention is directed to a therapeutic method for treating a patient with AD in order to inhibit further deterioration in the condition of that patient which method comprises administering to said patient a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically inert carrier and an effective amount of a compound or a mixture of compounds of formula I above.
In formula I above, R1 substituted phenyls are preferably 4-substituted, 3,5-disubstituted or 3,4-disubstituted phenyl substituents wherein the substituents at the 3 and/or 5 positions are defined by Rb, Rb' as above and the substituents at the 4 position is defined by Rc as above. Particularly preferred
3,5-disubstituted phenyls include, by way of example, 3,5-dichlorophenyl, 3,5- difluorophenyl, 3,5-di(trifluoromethyl)phenyl, 3,5-dimethoxyphenyl, and the like. Particularly, preferred 3,4-disubstituted phenyls include, by way of example, 3,4-dichlorophenyl, 3,4-difluorophenyl, 3-(trifluoromethyl)-4- chlorophenyl, 3-chloro-4-cyanophenyl, 3-chloro-4-iodophenyl, 3,4- methylenedioxyphenyl, and the like. Particularly preferred 4-substituted phenyls include, by way of example, 4-azidophenyl, 4-bromophenyl, 4- chlorophenyl, 4-cyanophenyl, 4-ethylphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4-iodophenyl, 4- (phenylcarbonyl)phenyl, 4-(l-ethoxy)ethylphenyl, and the like.
Other preferred R1 substituents include, by way of example, 2-naphthyl, quinolin-3-yl, 2-methylquinolin-6-yl, benzothiazol-6-yl, benzothiazol-2-yl, 5-indolyl, phenyl, 2-naphthyl, and the like.
Preferably R2 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylthioalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl and substituted heteroaryl provided that the substituents are not ortho to the attachment of the aryl or heteroaryl atom to the carbon atom. Particularly preferred R2 substituents include, by way of example, methyl, ethyl, /z-propyl, wø-propyl, n- butyl, iro-butyl, -CH2CH2SCH3, phenyl and the like.
Preferred R3 substituents include alkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, WO-propyl, n-butyl, wo-butyl, sec-butyl, and the like; substituted alkyl groups such as α-hydroxyefhyl, -CH2-cyclohexyl, benzyl, /j-hydroxybenzyl, 3-iodo-4-hydroxybenzyl, 3,5-diiodo-4-hydroxybenzyl, -CH2-indol-3-yl, phenyl,
-(CH2)4-NH-BOC, -(CH2)4-NH2, -CH2-(l-N-benzyl-imidazol-4-yl), -CH2- imidazol-4-yl, -CH2CH2SCH3, -(CH2)4NHC(O)(CH2)4CH3, -(CH2)yC(O)OR5 where y is 1 or 2 and R5 is hydrogen, methyl, tert-bxityl, phenyl, and the like.
Preferred X substituents include -C(O)Y groups where Y is methoxy, ethyoxy, n-propoxy, iso-propoxy, n-butoxy, iso-butoxy, t -butoxy, amino (-NH2), N-(/Λ?-butyl)amino, N-methylamino, N,N-dimethylamino, N-benzylamino, and the like as well as where X is -CH2OH and the like. This invention also provides for novel pharmaceutical compositions comprising a pharmaceutically inert carrier and a compound of the formula I above.
Particularly preferred compounds for use in the methods and compositions of this invention include, by way of example, the following wherein the stereochemistry of the R2 and R3 groups is preferably derived from the L-amino acid:
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyrjvaline methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]valine N-iso-butyl amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]threonine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyι]valine ethyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]valine t -butyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyrjvaline amide
N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanine N-(l-hydroxy-3-methyl-2-butyl) amide N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]valine N,N-dimethyl amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyr)alanyrjvaline N-methyl amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]alanine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]leucine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]phenylalanine methyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]isoleucine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminopentanoic acid methyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]tryptophan methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]aspartic acid α-methyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]aspartic acid β-(tert-butyl ester) α-methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-N-BOC-lysine methyl ester N-[N-benzothiazol-6-yl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]lysine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanylJtyrosine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]alanine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminopentanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]phenylalanine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]aspartic acid /3-(methyl ester) α-methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-l-benzylhistidine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]glutamic acid y-(tert-butyl ester) α-methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]leucine amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]glutamic acid α-methyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-(3,5-diiodo)tyrosine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-(3-iodo)tyrosine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)glycyl]-2-aminopentanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-Ne-(hexanoyl)lysine methyl ester V-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]phenylalanine amide N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexan-(N-methyl)-amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-/3-cyclohexylalanine methyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanamide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexan-(N,N-dimethyl)- amide N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]methionine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexan-(N,N-dimethyI)- amide N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanamide
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexan-(N-methyl)- amide N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]histidine methyl ester
N-[N-(quinolin-3-yl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(benzothiazol-2-yl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
N-[7V-(3,5-difluorophenyl)alanyl]alanine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-difluorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester N-[N-(3 ,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanarnide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexan-(N-benzyl)-amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-amino-2-phenylethanol
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)phenylglycinyl]alanine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanol N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-amino-2-phenylethanol
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-phenylglycine tert-butyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-di-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)alanyl]-phenylglycine tert- butyl ester N-[N-(3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
Still further, this invention provides for novel compounds of the formula
III:
Figure imgf000015_0001
R2
wherein:
R1 is selected from the group consisting of
(a) phenyl,
(b) a substituted phenyl group of formula II:
Figure imgf000015_0002
wherein Rc is selected from the group consisting of acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, azido, cyano, halo, hydrogen, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, and wherein Rb and Rc are fused to form a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring with the phenyl ring,
Rb and Rb' are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, alkoxy, and thioalkoxy with the proviso that when Rc is hydrogen, then Rb and Rb' are either both hydrogen or both substituents other than hydrogen, (c) 2-naphthyl, (d) 2-naphthyl substituted at the 4, 5, 6, 7 and/or 8 positions with 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, aryl, and heteroaryl,
(e) heteroaryl, and (f) substituted heteroaryl containing 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, thioalkoxy and thioaryloxy provided that said substituents are not ortho to the heteroaryl attachment to the -NH group;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylthioalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl and substituted heteroaryl provided that the substituents are not ortho to the attachment of the aryl or heteroaryl atom to the carbon atom;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, and heterocyclic;
X is -C(O)Y where Y is selected from the group consisting of
(a) alkyl,
(b) substituted alkyl with the proviso that the substitution on said substituted alkyl does not include α-haloalkyl, α-diazoalkyl or cx-OC(O)alkyl groups,
(c) alkoxy or thioalkoxy,
(d) substituted alkoxy or substituted thioalkoxy,
(e) hydroxy, (f) aryl,
(g) heteroaryl,
(h) heterocyclic,
(i) -NR'R" where R' and R" are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and where R' and R" are joined to form a cyclic group having from 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally containing 1 to 2 additional heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen and optionally substituted with one or more alkyl or alkoxy groups, and when R3 contains at least 3 carbon atoms, X can also be -CR4R4Y' where each R4 is independendy selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic and Y' is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, thiol, -OC(O)R5, -SSR5, -SSC(O)R5 where R5 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic, and with the proviso that when R1 is 3,4-dichlorophenyl, R2 is methyl, and R3 is benzyl derived from D-phenylglycine, then X is not -C(O)OCH3, and still with the further proviso excluding the following known compounds: when R1 is phenyl, R2 is methyl, X is -C(O)NHψ, then R3 is not methyl, iso-propyl, wo-butyl; and when R1 is phenyl, R2 is methyl, X is -C(O)NH2, then R3 is not benzyl.
Preferred compounds of formula III above include those set forth below in Table I below:
Figure imgf000017_0001
TABLE I
Figure imgf000018_0001
Figure imgf000019_0001
Figure imgf000020_0001
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
As above, this invention relates to compounds which inhibit /3-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis, and, accordingly, have utility in treating Alzheimer's disease. However, prior to describing this invention in further detail, the following terms will first be defined.
Definitions
The term "/3-amyloid peptide" refers to a 39-43 amino acid peptide having a molecular weight of about 4.2 kD which peptide is substantially homologous to the form of the protein described by Glenner, et al.1 including mutations and post-translational modifications of the normal /3-amyloid peptide. In whatever form, the β-amyloid peptide is approximately a 39-43 amino acid fragment of a large membrane-spanning glycoprotein, referred to as the β- amyloid precursor protein (APP). Its 43-amino acid sequence is: 1
Asp Ala Glu Phe Arg His Asp Ser Gly Tyr
11 Glu Val His His Gin Lys Leu Val Phe Phe
21
Ala Glu Asp Val Gly Ser Asn Lys Gly Ala
31
He lie Gly Leu Met Val Gly Gly Val Val
41
Ile Ala Thr (SEQ ID NO: 1)
or a sequence which is substantially homologous thereto.
"Alkyl" refers to monovalent alkyl groups preferably having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-pτopyl, n-butyl, iso- butyl, n-hexyl, and the like.
"Substituted alkyl" refers to an alkyl group, preferably of from 1 to 10 carbon atoms, having from 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, cyano, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cycloalkyl, oxyacylamino, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, nitro, and mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di- (substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-cycloalkylamino, mono- and di- arylamino, mono- and di-heteroaryl-amino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
"Alkylene" refers to divalent alkylene groups preferably having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 1 to 6 carbon atoms. This term is exemplified by groups such as methylene (-CH2-), ethylene (-CH2CH2-), the propylene isomers (e.g. , -CH2CH2CH2- and -CH(CH3)CH2-) and the like.
"Alkaryl" refers to -alkylene-aryl groups preferably having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms in the alkylene moiety and from 6 to 10 carbon atoms in the aryl moiety. Such alkaryl groups are exemplified by benzyl, phenethyl and the like.
"Alkoxy" refers to the group "alkyl-O-". Preferred alkoxy groups include, by way of example, methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, iso-propoxy, 77-butoxy, tert-butoxy, sec-butoxy, n-pentoxy, n-hexoxy, 1,2-dimethylbutoxy, and the like.
"Substituted alkoxy" refers to the group "substituted alkyl-O-" where substituted alkyl is as defined above.
"Alkylalkoxy" refers to the group "-alkylene-O-alkyl" where alkylene and alkyl are as defined above. Such groups include, by way of example, methylenemethoxy (-CH2OCH3), ethylenemethoxy (-CH2CH2OCH3), n-propylene-ώO-propoxy (-CH2CH2CH2OCH(CH3)2) , methylene-tert-butoxy (-CH2-O-C(CH3)3) and the like.
"Alkylthioalkoxy" refers to the group "-alkylene-S-alkyl" where alkylene and alkyl are as defined above. Such groups include, by way of example, methylenethio ethoxy (-CH2SCH3), ethylenethiomethoxy (-CH2CH2SCH3), n-propylene-wo-thiopropoxy (-CH2CH2CH2SCH(CH3)2), methylenethio-t - butoxy (-CH2SC(CH3)3) and the like.
"Alkenyl" refers to alkenyl groups preferably having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-2 sites of alkenyl unsaturation. Preferred alkenyl groups include ethenyl (-CH = CH2), n-propenyl (-CH2CH = CH2), /.yø-propenyl (-C(CH3)=CH2), and the like.
"Substituted alkenyl" refers to an alkenyl group as defined above having from 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, cyano, cycloalkyl, oxy acylamino, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, nitro, and mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-cycloalkyl, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
"Alkynyl" refers to alkynyl groups preferably having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and more preferably 2 to 6 carbon atoms and having at least 1 and preferably from 1-2 sites of alkynyl unsaturation. Preferred alkynyl groups include ethynyl (-C ≡ CH), propargyl (-CH2C ≡CH) and the like.
"Substituted alkynyl" refers to an alkynyl group as defined above having from 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, acyl, acylamino, acyloxy, amino, aminoacyl, aminoacyloxy, cyano, cycloalkyl, oxyacylamino, halogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, thiol, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, nitro, and mono- and di-alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-cycloalkylamino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono- and di- heteroarylamino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, and unsymmetric di- substituted amines having different substituents selected from alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic.
"Acyl" refers to the groups alkyl-C(O)-, substituted alkyl-C(O)-, cycloalkyl-C(O)-, aryl-C(O)-, heteroaryl-C(O)- and heterocyclic-C(O)- where alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Acylamino" refers to the group -C(O)NRR where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic and where each of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Aminoacyl" refers to the group -NRC(O)R where each R is independently hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic and where each of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Acyloxy" refers to the groups -OC(O)-alkyl, -OC(O)-substituted alkyl, -OC(O)-cycloalkyl, -OC(O)-aryl, -C(O)O-heteroaryl-, and -C(O)O-heterocyclic where alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Aminoacyloxy" refers to the groups -NRC(O)O-alkyl, -NRC(O)O- substituted alkyl, -NRC(O)O-cycloalkyl, -NRC(O)O-aryl, -NRC(O)O- heteroaryl-, and -NRC(O)O-heterocyclic where R is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic and where each of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein.
"Oxyacylamino" refers to the groups -OC(O)NR-alkyl, -OC(O)NR- substituted alkyl, -OC(O)NR-aryl, -OC(O)NR-heteroaryl-, and -OC(O)NR- heterocyclic where R is hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, and heterocyclic and where each of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic are as defined herein. "Aryl" refers to an unsaturated aromatic carbocyclic group of from 6 to 14 carbon atoms having a single ring (e.g., phenyl) or multiple condensed rings (e.g. , naphthyl or anthryl). Preferred aryls include phenyl, naphthyl and the like.
Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the aryl substituent, such aryl groups can optionally be substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, acyl, acyloxy, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, aminoacyl, acylamino, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, aryl, aryloxy, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, mono- and di- alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di- cycloalkylamino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono-and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic, and the like. Preferred substituents include alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, and thioalkoxy. When so substituted, such aryl groups are sometimes referred to herein as "substituted aryl".
"Aryloxy" refers to the group aryl-O- wherein the aryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups as also defined above.
"Carboxyalkyl" refers to the groups -C(O)O-alkyl and
-C(O)O-substituted alkyl where alkyl and substituted alkyl are as defined herein.
"Cycloalkyl" refers to cyclic alkyl groups of from 3 to 20 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring or multiple condensed rings (including aromatic rings fused to the cycloalkyl ring) which can be optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 alkyl groups. Such cycloalkyl groups include, by way of example, single ring structures such as cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclooctyl, 1- methylcyclopropyl, 2-methylcyclopentyl, 2-methylcyclooctyl, and the like, or multiple ring structures such as dibenzosuberane, adamantanyl, and the like.
"Cycloalkenyl" refers to cyclic alkenyl groups of from 4 to 8 carbon atoms having a single cyclic ring or multiple condensed rings and at least one point of internal unsaturation which can be optionally substituted with from 1 to 3 alkyl groups. Examples of suitable cycloalkenyl groups include, for instance, cyclobut-2-enyl, cyclopent-3-enyl, cyclooct-3-enyl and the like.
"Halo" or "halogen" refers to fluoro, chloro, bromo and iodo and preferably is either chloro or bromo.
"Heteroaryl" refers to a monovalent aromatic group of from 2 to 10 carbon atoms and 1 to 4 heteroatoms selected from oxygen, nitrogen and sulfur within the ring.
Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the heteroaryl substituent, such heteroaryl groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, acyl, acyloxy, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, aminoacyl, acylamino, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, aryl, aryloxy, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, mono- and di- alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di- cycloalkylamino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono-and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic, and the like. Such heteroaryl groups can have a single ring (e.g., pyridyl, furyl, etc.) or multiple condensed rings (e.g., indolizinyl or benzothienyl). Preferred heteroaryls include pyridyl, pyrrolyl, and furyl. When so substituted, such heteroaryl groups are sometimes referred to herein as "substituted heteroaryl".
"Heterocycle" or "heterocyclic" refers to a monovalent saturated or unsaturated group having a single ring or multiple condensed rings, from 1 to 12 carbon atoms and from 1 to 4 hetero atoms selected from nitrogen, sulfur or oxygen within the ring.
Unless otherwise constrained by the definition for the heterocyclic substituent, such heterocyclic groups can be optionally substituted with 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of hydroxy, acyl, acyloxy, alkyl, substituted alkyl, alkoxy, substituted alkoxy, alkenyl, substituted alkenyl, alkynyl, substituted alkynyl, amino, aminoacyl, acylamino, aminoacyloxy, oxyacylamino, aryl, aryloxy, carboxyl, carboxylalkyl, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, substituted thioalkoxy, mono- and di- alkylamino, mono- and di-(substituted alkyl)amino, mono- and di-arylamino, mono-and di-heteroarylamino, mono- and di-heterocyclic amino, and unsymmetric di-substituted amines having different substituents selected from alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic, and the like. Such heterocyclic groups can have a single ring or multiple condensed rings. Preferred heterocyclics include morpholino, piperidinyl, and the' like.
Examples of heterocycles and heteroaryls include, but are not limited to, furan, thiophene, thiazole, oxazole, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthylpyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, phenanthroline, isothiazole, phenazine, isoxazole, phenoxazine, phenothiazine, imidazolidine, imidazoline, piperidine, piperazine, indoline, phthalimide,
1,2,3,4-tetrahydroisoquinoline, 4,5,6,7-tetrahydrobenzo[b]thiophene, thiazole, thiazolidine, thiophene, benzo[b]thiophene, morpholino, piperidinyl, pyrrolidine, tetrahydrofuranyl, and the like.
"Thiol" refers to the group -SH.
"Thioalkoxy" refers to the group -S-alkyl.
"Substituted thioalkoxy" refers to the group -S-substituted alkyl.
"Thioaryloxy" refers to the group aryl-S- wherein the aryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups as also defined above.
"Thioheteroaryloxy" refers to the group heteroaryl-S- wherein the heteroaryl group is as defined above including optionally substituted aryl groups as also defined above.
In the compounds of formula I, Rb and Rc can be fused to form a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring with the phenyl ring. Fusion in this manner results in a fused bicyclic ring structure of the formula:
Figure imgf000028_0001
where Rb' is as defined above and A is the fused heteroaryl or heterocyclic group as these terms are as defined above wherein the two atoms of the phenyl ring are included in the total atoms present in the heteroaryl or heterocyclic group. Examples of such fused ring systems include, for instance, indol-5-yl, indol-6-yl, thionaphthen-5-yl, thionaphthen-6-yl, isothionaphthen-5-yl, isothionaphthen-6-yl, indoxazin-5-yl, indoxazin-6-yl, benzoxazol-5-yl, benzoxazol-6-yl, anthranil-5-yl, anthranil-6-yl, quinolin-6-yl, quinolin-7-yl, isoquinolin-6-yl, isoquinolin-7-yl, cinnolin-6-yl, cinnolin-7-yl, quinazolin-6-yl, quinazolin-7-yl, benzofuran-5-yl, benzofuran-6-yl, isobenzofuran-5-yl, isobenzofuran-6-yl, and the like.
"Pharmaceutically acceptable salt" refers to pharmaceutically acceptable salts of a compound of Formula I which salts are derived from a variety of organic and inorganic counter ions well known in the art and include, by way of example only, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, ammonium, tetraalkylammonium, and the like; and when the molecule contains a basic functionality, salts of organic or inorganic acids, such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, tartrate, mesylate, acetate, maleate, oxalate and the like.
Compound Preparation
The compounds of formula I above are readily prepared via several divergent synthetic routes with the particular route selected relative to the ease of compound preparation, the commercial availability of starting materials, and the like.
In one synthetic method, the R1 group of the amino acid NH2CH(R )COOH or an ester thereof is first introduced onto the molecule. Afterwards, conventional coupling of the first R1NHCH(R2)COOH or ester thereof with the amine of NH2CH(R3)C(O)Y provides for compounds of formula I wherein X is -C(O)Y.
Similarly, conventional reduction of the -C(O)Y group leads to -CH2OH groups and the like. The introduction of the R1 group onto the amino acid NH2CH(R2)COOH or ester thereof can be accomplished using several methods. For example, conventional coupling of a halo acetic acid with a primary amine forms an amino acid as shown in reaction (1) below:
Figure imgf000030_0001
wherein R1 and R2 are as defined above and X' is preferably a halo group such as chloro or bromo. Alternatively, leaving groups other than halo may be employed such as triflate, mesylate, tosylate and the like. Additionally, suitable esters of 1 may be employed in this reaction.
Reaction (1) involves coupling of a suitable haloacetic acid derivative 1 with a primary aryl/heteroarylamine 2 under conditions which provide for amino acid 3. This reaction is described by, for example, Yates, et al.10 and proceeds by combining approximately stoichiometric equivalents of haloacetic acid 1 with primary aryl/heteroarylamine 2 in a suitable inert diluent such as water, dimethylsulfoxide (DMSO) and the like. The reaction employs an excess of a suitable base such as sodium bicarbonate, sodium hydroxide, etc. to scavenge the acid generated by the reaction. The reaction is preferably conducted at from about 25 °C to about 100°C until reaction completion which typically occurs within 1 to about 24 hours. This reaction is further described in U.S. Patent No. 3,598,859, which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety. Upon reaction completion, N-aryl/N-heteroaryl amino acid 3 is recovered by conventional methods including precipitation, chromatography, filtration and the like. In reaction (1), each of the reagents (haloacetic acid 1, primary aryl/heteroarylamine 2 and alcohol 3) are well known in the art with a plurality of each being commercially available.
In an alternative embodiment, the R1 group can be coupled to an alanine ester (or other suitable amino acid ester) by conventional N-arylation. For example, a stoichiometric equivalent or slight excess of the amino acid ester can be dissolved in a suitable diluent such as DMSO and coupled with a haloaryl compound, X-R1 where X is a halo group such as fluoro, chloro or bromo and R1 is as defined above. The reaction is conducted in the presence of an excess of base such as sodium hydroxide to scavenge the acid generated by the reaction. The reaction typically proceeds at from 15 °C to about 250°C and is complete in about 1 to 24 hours. Upon reaction completion, N-aryl amino acid ester is recovered by conventional methods including chromatography, filtration and the like.
In still another alternative embodiment, the esterified amino acids of formula I above can be prepared by reductive amination of a suitable 2- oxocarboxylic acid ester (such as a pyruvate ester) in the manner illustrated in Reaction (2) below:
Figure imgf000031_0001
5
wherein R1 and R2 are as defined above.
In reaction (2), approximately stoichiometric equivalents of a 2- oxocarboxylic acid ester 6 and arylamine 2 are combined in an inert diluent such as methanol, ethanol and the like and the reaction solution treated under conditions which provide for imine formation (not shown). The imine formed is then reduced under conventional conditions by a suitable reducing agent such as sodium cyanoborohydride, H2/palladium on carbon and the like to form the N-aryl amino acid ester 5. In a particularly preferred embodiment, the reducing agent is H2/palladium on carbon which is incorporated into the initial reaction medium which permits imine reduction in situ in a one pot procedure to provide for the N-aryl amino acid ester 5.
The reaction is preferably conducted at from about 20°C to about 80°C at a pressure of from 1 to 10 atmospheres until reaction completion which typically occurs within 1 to about 24 hours. Upon reaction completion, N-aryl amino acid ester 5 is recovered by conventional methods including chromatography, filtration and the like.
Subsequent hydrolysis of the ester 5 leads to the corresponding carboxylic acid derivative.
A further embodiment for preparing N-aryl amino acids includes aromatic nucleophilic substitution of fluorobenzenes by the amine group of an amino acid.
The carboxylic acid derivative 5 is then coupled under conventional conditions well known in the art with a compound of the formula NH2CH(R3)C(O)Y where R3 and Y are as defined above. Such coupling leads to compounds of formula I. Subsequent modifications (e.g., reduction) lead to further compounds of formula I.
When Y is an ester group, conventional transesterification techniques can be used to prepare a variety of different ester groups on the compounds of formula I. Numerous techniques are known in the art to effect transesterification and each technique merely replaces the ester group with a different ester group derived from the corresponding alcohol or thioalcohol and, in some cases, a catalyst such as titanium (IV) wø-propoxide is used to facilitate reaction completion. In one technique, the alcohol or thioalcohol is first treated with sodium hydride in a suitable diluent such as toluene to form the corresponding sodium alkoxide or thioalkoxide which is then employed to effect transesterification. The efficiency of this technique makes it particularly useful with high boiling and/or expensive alcohols.
In another transesterification technique, the ester to be transesterified is placed in a large excess of the alcohol or thioalcohol which effects transesterification. A catalytic amount of sodium hydride is then added and the reaction proceeds quickly under conventional conditions to provide the desired transesterified product. Because this protocol requires the use of a large excess of alcohol or thioalcohol, this procedure is particularly useful when the alcohol is inexpensive.
Transesterification provides a facile means to provide for a multiplicity of different ester substituents on the compounds of formula I above. In all cases, the alcohols and thioalcohols employed to effect transesterification are well known in the art with a significant number being commercially available.
Other methods for preparing the esters of this invention include, by way of example, first hydrolyzing the ester to the free acid followed by O-alkylation with, e.g. , a haloalkyl group in the presence of a base such as potassium carbonate.
Still other methods for the preparation of compounds of formula I are provided in the examples below. Compounds where X is -CR4R4Y' are readily prepared by coupling, e.g., an amino alcohol H2NCHR3CR4R4OH, to the carboxyl group of R1NHCHR2C(O)OH under standard coupling conditions well known in peptide coupling chemistry which can use well known coupling reagents such as carbodiimides with or without the use of well known additives such as N- hydroxysuccinimide, 1-hydroxybenzotriazole, etc. If necessary, well known blocking groups on Y' can be employed to protect the group during coupling. Such blocking groups are particularly desirable when Y' is an amino group.
The reaction is conventionally conducted in an inert aprotic diluent such as dimethylformamide, dichloromethane, chloroform, acetonitrile, tetrahydrofuran and the like. Upon reaction completion, any blocking groups on Y' are selectively removed to provide for the desired compound.
When Y' is -OH or -SH, post-synthetic conversion of these groups to the corresponding esters (i.e., -OC(O)R5), disulfides (i.e., -SSR5) and -SSC(O)R5 groups is accomplished using well known chemistry. For example, ester synthesis requires only reaction with a suitable acid such as acetic acid (R7 = methyl), acid halide (e.g., acid chloride) or acid anhydride under suitable esterification conditions.
When one of R4 groups is hydrogen, post- synthetic oxidation of the -CHR4OH group leads to the ketone derivatives. Alternatively, such ketones can be prepared by coupling the suitable aminoketoneΗCl salt with the terminal carboxyl group of the amino acid.
In these synthetic methods, the starting materials can contain a chiral center (e.g., alanine) and, when a racemic starting material is employed, the resulting product is a mixture of diastereomers or R,S enantiomers. Alternatively, a chiral isomer of the starting material can be employed and, if the reaction protocol employed does not racemize this starting material, a chiral product is obtained. Such reaction protocols can involve inversion of the chiral center during synthesis.
Accordingly, unless otherwise indicated, the products of this invention are a mixture of diastereomers (if two or more chiral centers are present) or
R,S enantiomers (if only one chiral center is present). Preferably, however, when a chiral product is desired, the chiral product corresponds to the L-amino acid derivative. Alternatively, chiral products can be obtained via purification techniques which separates diastereomers or enantiomers from a R,S mixture to provide for one or the other stereoisomer. Such techniques are well known in the art.
Pharmaceutical Formulations
When employed as pharmaceuticals, the compounds of formula I are usually administered in the form of pharmaceutical compositions. These compounds can be administered by a variety of routes including oral, rectal, transdermal, subcutaneous, intravenous, intramuscular, and intranasal. These compounds are effective as both injectable and oral compositions. Such compositions are prepared in a manner well known in the pharmaceutical art and comprise at least one active compound.
This invention also includes pharmaceutical compositions which contain, as the active ingredient, one or more of the compounds of formula I above associated with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. In making the compositions of this invention, the active ingredient is usually mixed with an excipient, diluted by an excipient or enclosed within such a carrier which can be in the form of a capsule, sachet, paper or other container. When the excipient serves as a diluent, it can be a solid, semi-solid, or liquid material, which acts as a vehicle, carrier or medium for the active ingredient. Thus, the compositions can be in the form of tablets, pills, powders, lozenges, sachets, cachets, elixirs, suspensions, emulsions, solutions, syrups, aerosols (as a solid or in a liquid medium), ointments containing, for example, up to 10% by weight of the active compound, soft and hard gelatin capsules, suppositories, sterile injectable solutions, and sterile packaged powders.
In preparing a formulation, it may be necessary to mill the active compound to provide the appropriate particle size prior to combining with the other ingredients. If the active compound is substantially insoluble, it ordinarily is milled to a particle size of less than 200 mesh. If the active compound is substantially water soluble, the particle size is normally adjusted by milling to provide a substantially uniform distribution in the formulation, e.g. about 40 mesh.
Some examples of suitable excipients include lactose, dextrose, sucrose, sorbitol, mannitol, starches, gum acacia, calcium phosphate, alginates, tragacanth, gelatin, calcium silicate, microcrystalline cellulose, polyvinylpyrrolidone, cellulose, sterile water, syrup, and methyl cellulose. The formulations can additionally include: lubricating agents such as talc, magnesium stearate, and mineral oil; wetting agents; emulsifying and suspending agents; preserving agents such as methyl- and propylhydroxy- benzoates; sweetening agents; and flavoring agents. The compositions of the invention can be formulated so as to provide quick, sustained or delayed release of the active ingredient after administration to the patient by employing procedures known in the art.
The compositions are preferably formulated in a unit dosage form, each dosage containing from about 5 to about 100 mg, more usually about 10 to about 30 mg, of the active ingredient. The term "unit dosage forms" refers to physically discrete units suitable as unitary dosages for human subjects and other mammals, each unit containing a predetermined quantity of active material calculated to produce the desired therapeutic effect, in association with a suitable pharmaceutical excipient. Preferably, the compound of formula I above is employed at no more than about 20 weight percent of the pharmaceutical composition, more preferably no more than about 15 weight percent, with the balance being pharmaceutically inert carrier(s).
The active compound is effective over a wide dosage range and is generally administered in a pharmaceutically effective amount. It, will be understood, however, that the amount of the compound actually administered will be determined by a physician, in the light of the relevant circumstances, including the condition to be treated, the chosen route of administration, the actual compound administered, the age, weight, and response of the individual patient, the severity of the patient's symptoms, and the like.
For preparing solid compositions such as tablets, the principal active ingredient is mixed with a pharmaceutical excipient to form a solid preformulation composition containing a homogeneous mixture of a compound of the present invention. When referring to these preformulation compositions as homogeneous, it is meant that the active ingredient is dispersed evenly throughout the composition so that the composition may be readily subdivided into equally effective unit dosage forms such as tablets, pills and capsules. This solid preformulation is then subdivided into unit dosage forms of the type described above containing from, for example, 0.1 to about 500 mg of the active ingredient of the present invention.
The tablets or pills of the present invention may be coated or otherwise compounded to provide a dosage form affording the advantage of prolonged action. For example, the tablet or pill can comprise an inner dosage and an outer dosage component, the latter being in the form of an envelope over the former. The two components can be separated by an enteric layer which serves to resist disintegration in the stomach and permit the inner component to pass intact into the duodenum or to be delayed in release. A variety of materials can be used for such enteric layers or coatings, such materials including a number of polymeric acids and mixtures of polymeric acids with such materials as shellac, cetyl alcohol, and cellulose acetate.
The liquid forms in which the novel compositions of the present invention may be incorporated for administration orally or by injection include aqueous solutions, suitably flavored syrups, aqueous or oil suspensions, and flavored emulsions with edible oils such as corn oil, cottonseed oil, sesame oil, coconut oil, or peanut oil, as well as elixirs and similar pharmaceutical vehicles.
Compositions for inhalation or insufflation include solutions and suspensions in pharmaceutically acceptable, aqueous or organic solvents, or mixtures thereof, and powders. The liquid or solid compositions may contain suitable pharmaceutically acceptable excipients as described supra. Preferably the compositions are administered by the oral or nasal respiratory route for local or systemic effect. Compositions in preferably pharmaceutically acceptable solvents may be nebulized by use of inert gases. Nebulized solutions may be inhaled directly from the nebulizing device or the nebulizing device may be attached to a face mask tent, or intermittent positive pressure breathing machine. Solution, suspension, or powder compositions may be administered, preferably orally or nasally, from devices which deliver the formulation in an appropriate manner.
The following formulation examples illustrate representative pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention.
Formulation Example 1 Hard gelatin capsules containing the following ingredients are prepared: Quantity Ingredient (mg/capsule)
Active Ingredient 30.0
Starch 305.0
Magnesium stearate 5.0
The above ingredients are mixed and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 340 mg quantities.
Formulation Example 2 A tablet formula is prepared using the ingredients below:
Quantity Ingredient (mg/tablef)
Active Ingredient 25.0
Cellulose, microcrystalline 200.0
Colloidal silicon dioxide 10.0 Stearic acid 5.0
The components are blended and compressed to form tablets, each weighing 240 mg.
Formulation Example 3 A dry powder inhaler formulation is prepared containing the following components:
Ingredient Weight %
Active Ingredient 5
Lactose 95
The active ingredient is mixed with the lactose and the mixture is added to a dry powder inhaling appliance. Formulation Example 4 Tablets, each containing 30 mg of active ingredient, are prepared as follows:
Quantity
Ingredient (me/tablef)
Active Ingredient 30.0 mg
Starch 45.0 mg
Microcrystalline cellulose 35.0 mg
Polyvinylpyrrolidone
(as 10% solution in sterile water) 4.0 mg
Sodium carboxymethyl starch 4.5 mg
Magnesium stearate 0.5 mg
Talc 1.0 mg
Total 120 mg
The active ingredient, starch and cellulose are passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve and mixed thoroughly. The solution of polyvinylpyrrolidone is mixed with the resultant powders, which are then passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve. The granules so produced are dried at 50° to 60 °C and passed through a 16 mesh U.S. sieve. The sodium carboxymethyl starch, magnesium stearate, and talc, previously passed through a No. 30 mesh U.S. sieve, are then added to the granules which, after mixing, are compressed on a tablet machine to yield tablets each weighing 120 mg.
Formulation Example 5 Capsules, each containing 40 mg of medicament are made as follows:
Quantity
Ingredient (mg/capsule)
Active Ingredient 40.0 mg Starch 109.0 mg
Magnesium stearate 1.0 mg
Total 150.0 mg The active ingredient, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in 150 mg quantities.
Formulation Example 6
Suppositories, each containing 25 mg of active ingredient are made as follows:
Ingredient Amount
Active Ingredient 25 mg
Saturated fatty acid glycerides to 2,000 mg
The active ingredient is passed through a No. 60 mesh U.S. sieve and suspended in the saturated fatty acid glycerides previously melted using the minimum heat necessary. The mixture is then poured into a suppository mold of nominal 2.0 g capacity and allowed to cool.
Formulation Example 7 Suspensions, each containing 50 mg of medicament per 5.0 mL dose are made as follows:
Ingredient Amount
Active Ingredient 50.0 mg
Xanthan gum 4.0 mg
Sodium carboxymethyl cellulose (11 %)
Microcrystalline cellulose (89%) 50.0 mg
Sucrose 1.75 g
Sodium benzoate 10.0 mg
Flavor and Color q.v.
Purified water to 5.0 mL
The active ingredient, sucrose and xanthan gum are blended, passed through a No. 10 mesh U.S. sieve, and then mixed with a previously made solution of the microcrystalline cellulose and sodium carboxymethyl cellulose in water. The sodium benzoate, flavor, and color are diluted with some of the water and added with stirring. Sufficient water is then added to produce the required volume.
Formulation Example 8 Quantity
Ingredient (mg/capsule)
Active Ingredient 15.0 mg
Starch 407.0 mg Magnesium stearate 3.0 mg
Total 425.0 mg
The active ingredient, starch, and magnesium stearate are blended, passed through a No. 20 mesh U.S. sieve, and filled into hard gelatin capsules in
425.0 mg quantities.
Formulation Example 9 A subcutaneous formulation may be prepared as follows: Ingredient Quantity
Active Ingredient 5.0 mg
Corn Oil 1.0 mL
Formulation Example 10 A topical formulation may be prepared as follows:
Ingredient Quantity
Active Ingredient 1-10 g
Emulsifying Wax 30 g
Liquid Paraffin 20 g
White Soft Paraffin to 100 g
The white soft paraffin is heated until molten. The liquid paraffin and emulsifying wax are incorporated and stirred until dissolved. The active ingredient is added and stirring is continued until dispersed. The mixture is then cooled until solid.
Another preferred formulation employed in the methods of the present invention employs transdermal delivery devices ("patches"). Such transdermal patches may be used to provide continuous or discontinuous infusion of the compounds of the present invention in controlled amounts. The construction and use of transdermal patches for the delivery of pharmaceutical agents is well known in the art. See, e.g.. U.S. Patent 5,023,252, issued June 11, 1991, herein incorporated by reference. Such patches may be constructed for continuous, pulsatile, or on demand delivery of pharmaceutical agents.
Frequently, it will be desirable or necessary to introduce the pharmaceutical composition to the brain, either directly or indirectly. Direct techniques usually involve placement of a drug delivery catheter into the host's ventricular system to bypass the blood-brain barrier. One such implantable delivery system used for the transport of biological factors to specific anatomical regions of the body is described in U.S. Patent 5,011 ,472 which is herein incorporated by reference.
Indirect techniques, which are generally preferred, usually involve formulating the compositions to provide for drug latentiation by the conversion of hydrophihc drugs into lipid-soluble drugs. Latentiation is generally achieved through blocking of the hydroxy, carbonyl, sulfate, and primary amine groups present on the drug to render the drug more lipid soluble and amenable to transportation across the blood-brain barrier. Alternatively, the delivery of hydrophihc drugs may be enhanced by intra-arterial infusion of hypertonic solutions which can transiently open the blood-brain barrier. Other suitable formulations for use in the present invention can be found in Remington 's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Mace Publishing Company, Philadelphia, PA, 17th ed. (1985).
Utility
The compounds and pharmaceutical compositions of the invention are useful in inhibiting /3-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis, and, accordingly, have utility in treating Alzheimer's disease in mammals including humans.
As noted above, the compounds described herein are suitable for use in a variety of drug delivery systems described above. Additionally, in order to enhance the in vivo serum half-life of the administered compound, the compounds may be encapsulated, introduced into the lumen of liposomes, prepared as a colloid, or other conventional techniques may be employed which provide an extended serum half-life of the compounds. A variety of methods are available for preparing liposomes, as described in, e.g., Szoka, et al., U.S. Patent Nos. 4,235,871, 4,501 ,728 and 4,837,028 each of which is incorporated herein by reference.
The amount of compound administered to the patient will vary depending upon what is being administered, the purpose of the administration, such as prophylaxis or therapy, the state of the patient, the manner of administration, and the like. In therapeutic applications, compositions are administered to a patient already suffering from AD in an amount sufficient to at least partially arrest further onset of the symptoms of the disease and its complications. An amount adequate to accomplish this is defined as "therapeutically effective dose. " Amounts effective for this use will depend on the judgment of the attending clinician depending upon factors such as the degree or severity of AD in the patient, the age, weight and general condition of the patient, and the like. Preferably, for use as therapeutics, the compounds described herein are administered at dosages ranging from about 0.1 to about 500 mg/kg/day.
In prophylactic applications, compositions are administered to a patient at risk of developing AD (determined for example by genetic screening or familial trait) in an amount sufficient to inhibit the onset of symptoms of the disease. An amount adequate to accomplish this is defined as "prophylactically effective dose. " Amounts effective for this use will depend on the judgment of the attending clinician depending upon factors such as the age, weight and general condition of the patient, and the like. Preferably, for use as prophylactics, the compounds described herein are administered at dosages ranging from about 0.1 to about 500 mg/kg/day.
As noted above, the compounds administered to a patient are in the form of pharmaceutical compositions described above. These compositions may be sterilized by conventional sterilization techniques, or may be sterile filtered. When aqueous solutions are employed, these may be packaged for use as is, or lyophilized, the lyophilized preparation being combined with a sterile aqueous carrier prior to administration. The pH of the compound preparations typically will be between 3 and 11 , more preferably from 5 to 9 and most preferably from 7 and 8. It will be understood that use of certain of the foregoing excipients, carriers, or stabilizers will result in the formation of pharmaceutical salts.
The following synthetic and biological examples are offered to illustrate this invention and are not to be construed in any way as limiting the scope of this invention. Unless otherwise stated, all temperatures are in degrees Celsius. EXAMPLES
In the examples below, the following abbreviations have the following meanings. If an abbreviation is not defined, it has its generally accepted meaning.
BOC = rert-butoxycarbonyl bd = broad doublet bs = broad singlet
Cbz = carbobenzyloxy cc = cubic centimeter
CDI = 1 , 1 '-carbonyldiimidazole d = doublet dd = doublet of doublets
DMF = dimethylformamide
DMSO = dimethyl sulfoxide
EDC = l-(3-dimethyaminopropyl)-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride
EDTA = ethylene diamine tetraacetic acid eq. = equivalents ether = diethyl ether g = grams
L = liter m = multiplet
M = molar max = maximum mg = milligram min. = minutes mL = milliliter mM = millimolar mmol = millimole
N = normal ng = nanogram nm = nanometers
OD = optical density pg = picograms pM = picomolar psi = pounds per square inch q = quartet quint. = quintet rpm = rotations per minute rt = room temperature s = singlet sept = septet t = triplet
THF = tetrahydrofuran tic = thin layer chromatography μg = microgram μL = microliter
UV = ultraviolet w/v = weight to volume
Additionally, the term "Aldrich" indicates that the compound or reagent used in the following procedures is commercially available from Aldrich Chemical Company, Inc. , 1001 West Saint Paul Avenue, Milwaukee, WI 53233 USA; the term "Bachem" indicates the compound or reagent is commercially available from Bachem Biosciences Inc. , 3700 Horizon Drive, Renaissance at Gulph Mills, King of Prussia, PA 19406 USA; the term "Fluka" indicates the compound or reagent is commercially available from Fluka Chemical Corp., 980 South 2nd Street, Ronkonkoma, NY 11779 USA; the term "Lancaster" indicates the compound or reagent is commercially available from Lancaster
Synthesis, Inc., P.O. Box 100, Windham, NH 03087 USA; the term "Sigma" indicates the compound or reagent is commercially available from Sigma, P.O. Box 14508, St. Louis, MO 63178 USA; and the term "Sennchem" indicates the compound or reagent is commercially available from Senn Chemicals AG, P.O. Box 267, CH-9157 Dielsdorf, Switzerland.
In the examples below, all temperatures are in degrees Celsius (unless otherwise indicated) and the following general procedures were used prepare the compounds as indicated.
GENERAL PROCEDURE A Reductive Amination To a solution of arylamine in ethanol in a hydrogenation flask was added 1 equivalent of the 2-oxocarboxylic acid ester (e.g. , pyruvate ester), followed by 10% palladium on carbon (25 weight percent based on the arylamine). The reaction was hydrogenated at 20 psi H2 on a Parr shaker until complete reaction was indicated by tic (30 minutes to 16 hours). The reaction mixture was then filtered through a pad of Celite 545 (available from Aldrich Chemical Company, Inc.) and stripped free of solvent on a rotary evaporator. The crude product residue was then further purified via chromatography.
GENERAL PROCEDURE B N-Heteroarylation of Alanine
A solution of 1.1 equivalents of L-alanine and 2 equivalents NaOH in DMSO was stirred at room temperature for 1 hour, then 1 equivalent of 2- chlorobenzothiazole was added. The mixture was heated to 100°C for 4 hours, then cooled to room temperature and poured onto ice. The pH of the resulting aqueous solution was adjusted to ~ 2, and the precipitated solid was removed by filtration. This solid was then dissolved in IN NaOH and the resulting solution was filtered through a pad of Celite 545. The pH of the filtrate was adjusted to ~ 2, and the white precipitate was removed by filtration and washed with water to yield the product.
GENERAL PROCEDURE C Ester Hydrolysis to Free Acid Ester hydrolysis to the free acid was conducted by conventional methods. Below are two examples of such conventional de-esterification methods.
To a carboxylic ester compound (prepared, for example, by reductive amination via General Procedure A to provide for the N-aryl amino acid ester) in a 1: 1 mixture of CH3OH/H2O was added 2-5 equivalents of K2CO3. The mixture was heated to 50°C for 0.5 to 1.5 hours until tic showed complete reaction. The reaction was cooled to room temperature and the methanol was removed on a rotary evaporator. The remaining aqueous solution was adjusted to pH~ 2, and ethyl acetate was added to extract the product. The organic phase was then washed with saturated aqueous NaCl and dried over MgSO4. The solution was stripped free of solvent on a rotary evaporator to yield the product. The amino acid ester was dissolved in dioxane/water (4: 1) to which was added LiOH ( - 2 eq.) that was dissolved in water such that the total solvent after addition was about 2: 1 dioxane: water. The reaction mixture was stirred until reaction completion and the dioxane was removed under reduced pressure. The residue was diluted with EtOAc, the layers were separated and the aqueous layer acidified to pH 2. The aqueous layer was back extracted with EtOAc, the combined organics were dried over Na2SO4 and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure after filtration. The residue was purified by conventional methods (e.g. , recrystallization).
The following exemplifies this latter example. The methyl ester of 3-NO2 phenylacetyl alanine 9.27 g (0.0348 mols) was dissolved in 60 mL dioxane and 15 mL of H2O and adding LiOH (3.06 g, 0.0731 mol) that has been dissolved in 15 mL of H2O. After stirring for 4 hours, the dioxane was removed under reduced pressure and the residue diluted with EtOAc, the layers were separated and the aqueous layer acidified to pH 2. The aqueous layer was back extracted with EtOAc (4 X 100 mL), the combined organics were dried over Na2SO4 and the solvent was removed under reduced pressure after filtration. The residue was recrystallized from EtOAc/isooctane giving 7.5 g (85%). C,,H12N2O5 requires C, 52.38 H, 4.80 N, 11.11. Anal found C, 52.54 H, 4.85 N, 11.08.
[α]23 = - 29.9 @ 589 nm.
GENERAL PROCEDURE D First EDC Coupling Procedure To a 1 : 1 mixture of the desired acid and amino ester/amide in CH2C1 at
0°C was added 1.5 equivalents triethylamine, followed by 2.0 equivalents hydroxybenzotriazole monohydrate, then 1.25 equivalents of ethyl-3-(3- dimethylamino)-propyl carbodiimideΗCl (EDC). The reaction was stirred overnight at room temperature, then transferred to a separatory funnel and washed with water, saturated aqueous NaHCO3, IN HCI, and saturated aqueous NaCl, and was then dried over MgSO4. The solution was stripped free of solvent on a rotary evaporator to yield the crude product.
GENERAL PROCEDURE E Second EDC Coupling Procedure
The carboxylic acid was dissolved in methylene chloride. The amino acid ester/amide (1 eq.), N-mefhylmorpholine (5 eq.) and hydroxybenzotriazole monohydrate (1.2 eq.) were added in sequence. A cooling bath was applied to the round bottomed flask until the solution reached 0°C. At that time, 1.2 eq. of l-(3-dimethylaminopropyl)-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (EDC) was added. The solution was allowed to stir overnight and come to room temperature under nitrogen pressure. The reaction mixture was worked up by washing the organic phase with saturated aqueous sodium carbonate, 0. IM citric acid, and brine before drying with sodium sulfate. The solvents were then removed to yield crude product. Pure products were obtained by flash chromatography in an appropriate solvent.
GENERAL PROCEDURE F BOC and terr-Butyl Ester Removal Procedure The BOC- or tert-butyl ester compound was added to a 1: 1 mixture of
CH2C12 and trifluoroacetic acid, and was stirred until tic indicated complete conversion, typically 2 hours. The solution was then stripped to dryness and the residue was taken up in ethyl acetate. For the BOC protected compounds the solution was washed with dilute HCI. The aqueous phase was adjusted to a basic pH, then extracted with ethyl acetate. For the tert-butyl ester compounds, the solution was washed with saturated aqueous NaHCO3. The aqueous phase was then adjusted to pH 2 and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organic phase for either case was then washed with saturated aqueous NaCl and dried over MgSO4. The solution was stripped free of solvent on a rotary evaporator to yield the product. GENERAL PROCEDURE G N-Alkylation To a solution of 3-aminoquinoline in CH2C12 was added 1.1 equivalent of triethylamine, followed by a CH2C12 solution of / -nitrobenzenesulfonyl (nosyl) chloride. The reaction was stirred at room temperature for 5 hours, then the di-nosylated aminoquinoline was isolated by filtration and was washed with ethyl acetate. This material was then added to a 1: 1 mixture of dioxane and IN NaOH and this solution was heated to 60 °C for 4 hours, at which time all solids had dissolved. The reaction was cooled to room temperature, then the pH was adjusted to ~ 4. The precipitated mono-nosylated aminoquinoline was removed by filtration and washed with H2O. A solution of this compound in THF was then added to a -78 °C suspension of NaH in THF, then ethyl 2- bromopropionate was added. The reaction was warmed to it, then refluxed for 4 days. The crude reaction mixture was stripped free of solvent on a rotary evaporator, and the alkylated, nosylated aminoquinoline was obtained by chromatography. This product was then dissolved in DMF and 3 equivalents K2CO3 was added, followed by 1.2 equivalents of thiophenol. The reaction was stirred overnight at room temperature. The reaction was then quenched with water and ether, and the organic phase was washed with saturated aqueous NaHCO3 and saturated aqueous NaCl, then dried over MgSO4. The solution was stripped free of solvent on a rotary evaporator to yield the crude product, which was then purified through chromatography.
GENERAL PROCEDURE H Ester/Amide Exchange
To a solution of 3 equivalents of the desired amine in 1 ,2-dichloroethane was added 5.2 equivalents trimethylaluminum wherein said addition was conducted below the surface of the solution via syringe. After stirring for 30 minutes at room temperature, a solution of the desired ester dissolved in 1,2- dichloroethane was added. The reaction was refluxed until tic showed complete conversion, typically 3 hours. The reaction was then cooled to 0°C and quenched with 10% HCI (Note: the acid should be added slowly as some foaming occurs during its addition). For those products not soluble in aqueous acid, the mixture was transferred to a separatory funnel and the layers were separated. The aqueous phase was washed with ethyl acetate, and the organic phases were washed with saturated aqueous NaCl, dried over MgSO4, and concentrated under reduced pressure to leave the crude product.
For products soluble in aqueous acid, after reaction quench, the reaction volume was reduced to — 1/3 of initial volume under reduced pressure. To the resulting solution was added 20% aqueous potassium sodium tartrate
(Rochelle's salt) and ethyl acetate. The pH of the solution was adjusted to — 13, and the aluminum salts dissolved in the aqueous solution. The organic phase was separated, and the aqueous phase was extracted with ethyl acetate. The combined organic solution was washed with saturated aqueous NaCl, dried over MgSO4, and concentrated under reduced pressure to leave the crude product.
GENERAL PROCEDURE I Ester Reduction to Alcohol To a 0°C solution of the starting ester in anhydrous THF was added 1.0 equivalent of LiBH4 in THF. The reaction was stirred at room temperature overnight, and was then quenched with water. The THF was removed on a rotary evaporator, and ethyl acetate was added, and the phases were separated. The organic phase was washed with saturated aqueous NaCl, dried over MgSO4, and concentrated under reduced pressure to leave the product.
GENERAL PROCEDURE J Triflate Displacement To a 0°C solution of isobutyl R-(+)-lactate in CH2C12 was added 1.1 equivalents of trifluoromethanesulfonic anhydride. After stirring at room temperature for 20 minutes, 1.1 equivalents of 2,6-lutidine was added and stirring was continued for 10 min. This solution was then transferred to a flask containing 1 equivalent arylamine and 1 equivalent diisopropylethylamine in CH2C12 or CH3NO2 at 0°C. The reaction was held overnight at room temperature, then stripped free of solvent on a rotary evaporator. The residue was dissolved in ethyl acetate, washed with 5% citric acid, followed by saturated aqueous NaCl, and then the solution was stripped free of solvent on a rotary evaporator to yield the crude product, which was then purified by chromatography.
GENERAL PROCEDURE K
Methyl Ester Formation from Amino Acids The amino acid (amino acid or amino acid hydrochloride) is suspended in methanol and chilled to 0°C. HCI gas is bubbled through this solution for 5 min. The reaction is allowed to warm to room temperature then stirred for 4 hours. The solvents are then removed to afford the desired amino acid methyl ester hydrochloride. This product is usually used without further purification.
Example A Synthesis of N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine Using the procedure set forth in U.S. Patent No. 3,598,859, the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference in its entirety, N-(3,4- dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine was prepared. Specifically, to a solution of 3,4- dichloroaniline (1 equivalent) (Aldrich) in isopropanol (about 500 mL per mole of 3,4-dichloroaniline) is added water (about 0.06 mL per mL of isopropanol) and 2-chloropropionic acid (2 equivalents) (Aldrich). This mixture is warmed to 40°C and sodium bicarbonate (0.25 equivalents) is added in successive portions before heating under reflux for 4-5 days. After cooling, the reaction mixture is poured into water and the unreacted 3,4-dichloroaniline is removed by filtration. The filtrate is acidified to pH 3-4 with concentrated hydrochloric acid and the resultant precipitate is filtered, washed and dried to yield the title compound, m.p. = 148-149°C. Alternatively, following General Procedure A above and using 3,4- dichloroaniline (Aldrich) and ethyl pyruvate (Aldrich), N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)- D,L-alanine ethyl ester was prepared as an oil. The reaction was monitored by tic on silica gel (Rf = 0.4 in 25 % EtOAc/Hexanes) and purification was by preparative plate chromatography (silica gel using 25 % EtOAc/Hexanes as eluent).
NMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13): δ = 7.2 (d, IH); 6.7 (d, IH,); 6.4 (dd, IH); 4.30 (bs, IH); 4.2 (q, 2H); 4.1 (q, IH); 1.5 (d, 3H); 1.3 (t, 3H). 13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 175; 146.7; 133; 131 ; 121 ; 114.9; 112.6; 72.0;
52.4; 28.3; 19.5.
CUH13C12N02 (MW = 262.14); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 263. Hydrolysis of this ester via, e.g. , General Procedure C provides the title compound.
Example B Synthesis of N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine Using the procedure set forth in U.S. Patent No. 3,598,859 (or Example A above), N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine was prepared using 3,5- dichloroaniline (Aldrich) and 2-chloropropionic acid (Aldrich).
Example C Synthesis of N-(3,5-difluorophenyl)-D,L-alanine
Using the procedure set forth in U.S. Patent No. 3,598,859 (or Example A above), N-(3,5-difluorophenyl)-D,L-alanine was prepared using 3,5- difluoroaniline (Aldrich) and 2-chloropropionic acid (Aldrich).
Example D Synthesis of L-Valine N,N-dimethyl amide To a stirred solution of 2.5 lg (10 mmol) of Cbz-L-Valine (Bachem) in 20 mL of DMF was added 1.46 g (9 mmol) of CDI and the mixture was stirred for 50 min. To this mixture was added 6 mL (12 mmol) of dimethylamine (Aldrich) in 5 mL of THF and the reaction mixture was stirred for 18 hours. The mixture was taken up in 100 mL of ethyl acetate, washed with 10% HCI (3 x 40 mL), 10 mL of brine, and 20% potassium carbonate (2 x 50 mL), and dried over MgSO4. The mixture was filtered and concentrated to yield Cbz-L- valine N,N-dimethyl amide, which was hydrogenated under standard conditions with 10% Pd/C as the catalyst to remove the Cbz group and provide the title compound as an oil.
ΝMR data was as follows: 'H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 3.47 (d, J = 5.4 Hz, IH), 3.03 (s, 3H), 2.96 (s,
3H), 1.83 (m, IH), 1.60 (s, 2H), 0.95 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 3H), 0.89 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 3H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 175.1 , 56.2, 37.0, 35.7, 32.0, 19.9, 16.8.
Example E
Synthesis of L- Valine N-methyl amide
The title compound was prepared following the procedure described in Example D above and using methylamine in place of dimethylamine. The title compound was an oil. ΝMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 7.27 (bs, IH), 3.20 (d, J = 3.8 Hz, IH), 2.79 (d, J = 5.0 Hz, 3H), 2.27 (m, IH), 1.40 (bs, 2H), 0.96 (d, J = 1. Hz, 3H), 0.79 (d, J = 6.8 Hz, 3H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 175.0, 60.1 , 30.7, 25.6, 19.7, 15.9.
Example F Synthesis of BOC-Νorleucine amide To a stirred mixture of 3.47 g (15 mmol) of BOC-norleucine (Bachem), 3.44 g (22.5 mmol) of 1-hydroxybenzotriazole monohydrate and 50 mL of dichloromethane at 0°C was added 3.45 g (1.2 mmol) of EDC. The resulting mixture was stirred at 0°C for 1 hour and then ammonia gas was bubbled through the mixture for 10 min. The cooling bath was allowed to warm to room temperature and the mixture stirred for 18 hours. The mixture was evaporated to dryness, triturated with 20% Na2CO3. The resulting solid was collected by filtration and washed with water to yield 2.69 g (11.7 mmol, 78%) of the title compound.
Example G Synthesis of N-[3,5-di(trifIuoromethyl)phenyl]-L-alanine Step A: Following General Procedure J and using 3,5- di(trifluoromethyl)aniline (Aldrich) and isobutyl R-(+)-lactate (Aldrich), N- [3,5-di(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-L-alanine isobutyl ester was prepared as an oil. The reaction was monitored by silica gel tic (Rf = 0.38 in 10% EtOAc/hexanes). Purification was by preparative plate thin layer chromatography using 10% EtOAc/hexanes as the eluant.
NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDCL): δ = 7.13 (s, IH), 6.91 (s, 2H), 4.97 (d, J = 8.24 Hz, IH), 4.18 (m, IH), 3.93 (d, J = 6.59 Hz, 2H), 1.93 (sept, J = 6.71 Hz, IH), 1.49 (d, J = 7.02 Hz, 3H), 0.89 (d, J = 6.59 Hz, 6H). 13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 174.4, 147.9, 133.6, 133.2, 132.7, 132.3, 129.4,
125.8, 122.2, 118.6, 112.81 , 112.76, 111.42, 111.37, 111.32, 111.27, 111.22, 72.2, 52.0, 32.1, 28.24, 28.17, 23.2, 19.5, 19.3, 19.2, 18.9, 14.6. CI5H,7F6N02 (MW = 357.30); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 358.
Step B: N-[3,5-Di(trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-L-alanine isobutyl ester was then hydrolyzed according to General Procedure C using lithium hydroxide in THF.
Example H Synthesis of N-(3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)-D,L-alanine
The title compound was prepared according to the procedure described in U.S. Patent No. 3,598,859 (or Example A above) using 3,5- dimethoxyaniline (Aldrich) and 2-chloropropionic acid (Aldrich).
Example I Synthesis of N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)glycine Using the procedure set forth in U.S. Patent No. 3,598,859, N-(3,4- dichlorophenyl)glycine was prepared using 3,4-dichloroaniline (Aldrich) and 2- chloroacetic acid (Aldrich).
Example J Synthesis of N-(3,5-dichlorophenyI)-D,L-phenylglycine
3,5-Dichloroaniline (1 eq.) (Aldrich) and methyl α-bromophenylacetate (1 eq.) (Aldrich) were refluxed in ethanol with N-methyl morpholine (Aldrich) for 3 days. After standard work-up, the residue was crystallized from ethyl acetate/hexane/ether/water to afford methyl N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-D,L- phenylglycine. The methyl ester was then hydrolyzed using IM NaOH/water in methanol to afford the title compound.
Example 1
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyI]-L- valine methyl ester
Following General Procedure D (without the IN HCI wash) and using L- valine methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma) and Ν-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanine (from Example A above), the title compound was prepared.
NMR data was as follows: 'H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 7.20 (m, IH), 6.92-7.03 (m, IH), 6.69 (m, IH),
6.44 (m, IH), 4.50 (m, IH), 4.19 (m, IH), 3.78 (m, IH), 3.71 (s, 1.5H), 3.65 (s, 1.5H), 2.12 (m, IH), 1.50 (d, J = 7.0 Hz, 3H), 0.80-0.92 (m, 4.5H), 0.71 (d, / = 6.8 Hz, 1.5H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 173.4, 173.0, 172.2, 171.8, 146.0, 145.8, 132.9, 132.8, 130.7, 130.6, 121.7, 115.1, 114.8, 113.5, 113.1, 56.9, 56.6, 55.1,
54.8, 52.2, 52.1, 31.1, 31.0, 30.9, 19.6, 19.4, 17.7, 17.4. Example 2
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-L-valine N-wø-butyl amide
Following General Procedure H above and using N-[N-(3,4- dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-L-valine methyl ester (from Example 1 above) and isobuty lamine (Aldrich), the title compound was prepared as a oil. The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.3 in 10% methanol/dichloromethane).
ΝMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13): δ = 7.2 (d, IH), 7.0 (m, IH), 6.7 (m, IH), 6.4 (m, IH), 4.6 (m, IH), 4.1 (m, IH), 3.8 (m, 3H), 3.6 (s, 3H), 1.9 (m, 2H), 1.4 (d,
3H), 1.1 (m, 6H), 0.9 (m, 6H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 173.8, 173.4, 172.9, 146.6, 133.6, 133.4, 131.3,
122.5, 122.4, 115.8, 113.8, 56.9, 55.7, 38.2, 25.6, 20, 16, 12.1.
CI8H27Ν3O2Cl2 (MW = 388.3); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 389.
Example 3
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-L-threonine methyl ester
Following General Procedure D (without the IN HCI wash) and using N- (3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine (from Example A above) and L-threonine methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma), the title compound was prepared as a oil.
The reaction product was purified by silica gel chromatography using 50% ethyl acetate/hexane.
ΝMR data was as follows: Η-nmr (CDC13): δ = 1.06 (d, J = 6.4) and 1.17 (d, J = 6.3; 3H total in
2: 1 ratio), 1.53 (d, 7 = 7, 3H), 2.31 (d, J = 5.6) and 2.58 (d, J = 4.7; IH total in 2: 1 ratio), 3.68 (s) and 3.75 (s) (3H total in 1:2 ratio), 3.8-3.9 (m,
IH), 4.15-4.25 (m, IH), 4.3-4.45 (m, IH), 4.5-4.6 (m, IH), 6.4-6.5 (m, IH),
6.65-6.7 (m, IH), 7.4-7.55 (m, 2H). 13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 19.96, 20.23, 20.39, 20.49, 53.23, 53.28, 55.35,
55.59, 57.5, 68.13, 68.21 , 113.72, 114.20, 115.42, 115.60, 122.26, 122.35, 131.22, 131.33, 133.41 , 133.55, 146.47, 146.6, 171.63, 171.80, 174.69, 174.86.
Cι4H18N2O4Cl2 (MW = 349.22); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 349.
Example 4
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichIorophenyI)-D,L-alanyl]-L-valine ethyl ester
Following General Procedure D (without the IN HCI wash) and using N-
(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine (from Example A above) and L-valine ethyl ester HCI, the title compound was prepared as a oil. The reaction product was purified by silica gel chromatography using 35 % ethyl acetate/hexane.
ΝMR data was as follows:
*H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 0.7-1.0 (overlapping group of d, 7 = 7, 6H), 1.19 and 1.27 (pair of t, 7 = 7, 3H), 1.5 (d, 7 = 7, 3H), 2.05-2.2 (m, IH), 3.7-3.9 (m, IH), 4.0-4.3 (m, 3H), 4.5-4.6 (m, IH), 6.4-6.5 (m, IH), 6.5-6.6 (m, IH),
6.9-7.1 (M, IH), 7.2-7.3 (M, IH).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 14.65, 14.77, 17.96, 18.25, 19.56, 20.06, 20.31,
31.77, 31.81, 55.50, 55.73, 57.22, 57.46, 61.88, 61.94, 113.76, 114.01,
115.48, 115.76, 122.40, 122.46, 131.30, 131.33, 133.48, 133.61, 146.41, 146.60, 171.86, 172.36, 173.54, 173.84.
C16H22Ν2O3Cl2 (MW = 361.27); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 361.
Example 5
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyI)-D,L-alanyl]-L-vaIine ert-butyl ester
Following General Procedure D (without the IN HCI wash) and using N- (3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine (from Example A above) and L-valine tert- butyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma), the title compound was prepared as a oil. The reaction product was purified by silica gel chromatography using 25 % ethyl acetate/hexane.
ΝMR data was as follows: 'H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 0.7-1.0 (overlapping group of d, 7 = 7, 6H), 1.36
(s) and 1.45 (s) (9H), 1.5-1.54 (2 d, 7 = 7, 3H), 2.0-2.2 (m, IH), 3.7-3.85
(m, IH), 4.1-4.2 (m, IH), 4.3-4.5 (m, IH), 6.4-6.5 (m, IH), 6.7 (s, IH), 6.9-
7.1 (m, IH), 7.15-7.3 (m, IH). 13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 17.84, 18.25, 19.50, 20.06, 20.29, 28.42, 28.62,
31.96, 32.16, 55.45, 55.65, 57.53, 57.92, 82.72, 113.75, 114.00, 115.43,
115.65, 122.26, 122.32, 131.29, 131.50, 146.46, 146.65, 170.88, 171.48,
173.39, 173.65.
C18H26N2O3Cl2 (MW = 389.33); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 389.
Example 6
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyI)-D,L-alanyl]-L-valine amide
Following General Procedure D (without the IN HCI wash) and using N- (3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine (from Example A above) and L-valine amide hydrochloride (Sigma), the title compound was prepared as a solid having a melting point of 156-158°C. The reaction product was purified by silica gel chromatography using 90:10: 1 CH2Cl2:MeOH:ΝH4OH.
NMR data was as follows: 'H-nmr (OMSO-d6): δ = 0.6-0.9 (m, 6H), 1.2-1.4 (overlapping d, 3H),
1.8-2.0 (m, IH), 3.9-4.2 (m, 2H), 6.3-6.4 (m, IH), 6.35-6.4 (m, IH), 6.7-6.8 (m, IH), 7.0-7.15 (m, IH), 7.2-7.3 (m, IH), 7.4 (bs, IH), 7.8 (d, 7 = 10) and 8.0 (d, 7 = 10) (total IH in 3:2 ratio).
13C-nmr DMSO-d6): δ = 17.8, 18.2, 19.00, 19.25, 19.6, 19.7, 31.16, 31.20, 51.9, 52.7, 57.11, 57.4, 113.46, 113.58, 113.67, 113.85, 117.20,
117.45, 130.64, 130.76, 131.53, 131.56, 148.25, 148.45, 173.06, 173.11, 173.38, 173.51.
C14H19N3O2Cl2 (MW = 331); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 332. Example 7
Synthesis of N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-L-aIanine N-(l-hydroxy-3-methyl-2-butyl) amide
Following General Procedure D (without the IN HCI wash) and using N- (3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine (from Example A above) and valinol (Sigma), the title compound was prepared as an oil. The reaction product was purified by silica gel chromatography using 45:55 EtOAc/hexanes and 90: 10:1
CH2Cl2:MeOH:ΝH4OH.
NMR data was as follows: 'H-nmr (OMSO-d6): δ = 0.86 (d, 7 = 7, 3H), 0.91 (d, 7 = 7, 3H), 1.50
(d, 7 = 7, 3H), 1.8-2.0 (m, IH), 2.6 (bs, IH), 3.5-3.8 (m, 4H), 4.1 (bs, IH),
6.45 (dd, J = 2.8, 8.7, IH), 6.7 (d, 7 = 2.8, IH), 6.8 (bd, IH), 7.2 (d, 7 =
5, IH).
13C-nmr DMSO-d6): δ = 19.3, 20.1, 20.2, 29.5, 55.8, 57.4, 64.1, 113.7, 115.7, 122.4, 131.4, 133.5, 146.6, 174.6.
C14H20N2O2C12 (MW = 319.23); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 319.
Example 8 Synthesis of
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyI]-L-valine N,N-dimethyl amide
Following General Procedure D and using valine N,N-dimethyl amide (from Example D above) and Ν-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine (from Example A above), the title compound was prepared as a solid (mp = 145- 160°C).
NMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13): δ = 7.38 (m, IH), 7.14 (m, IH), 6.66 (m, IH), 6.41 (m, IH), 4.78 (m, IH), 3.88 (m, IH), 3.10 and 3.09 (s,s, 3H), 2.94 and 2.90 (s,s, 3H), 1.96 (m, IH), 1.43 (m 3H), 0.88 and 0.67 (m, 6H). 13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 173.6, 173.1 , 171.4, 171.3, 146.3, 146.0, 132.7,
132.6, 130.52, 130.46, 120.9, 120.8, 114.5, 113.4, 113.0, 54.25, 54.15, 53.4, 53.2, 37.4, 35.6, 31.4, 31.3, 19.50, 19.46, 19.2, 17.5, 17.0.
C16H23N3O2Cl2 (MW = 360.29); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 360. Example 9
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichIorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-L-valine N-methyl amide
Following General Procedure D and using L-valine N-methyl amide (from Example E above) and Ν-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine (from Example A above), the title compound was prepared as a solid (mp = 145-160°C).
NMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (DMSO-d6) δ = 8.10 and 7.90 (m, 2H), 7.23 (m, IH), 6.76 and
6.69 (m, IH), 6.57 (m, IH), 6.34 (m, IH), 3.90-4.14 (m, 2H), 2.57 and 2.56 (s, s, 3H), 1.88 ( , IH), 1.27 (m, 3H), 0.65-0.86 (m, 6H).
13C-nmr (OMSO-d6): δ = 173.1, 171.2, 171.1, 148.1, 147.9, 131.19,
131.16, 130.4, 130.2, 116.8, 113.5, 113.2, 113.1, 57.5, 57.3, 52.2, 51.5,
30.9, 30.8, 25.4, 19.2, 19.1 , 18.8, 18.6, 18.2, 17.9.
C15H21N3O2Cl2 (MW = 346.26); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 346.
Example 10
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichIorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-L-aIanine methyl ester
Following General Procedure D (without the IN HCI wash) and using L- alanine methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma) and Ν-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L- alanine (from Example A above), the title compound was prepared as an oil.
The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.24 in 1: 1 EtOAc: Hexanes) and the product was purified by flash chromatography using 1: 1 EtOAc:Hexanes as the eluent. NMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13) δ = 7.15 (m, 2H), 6.63 (dd, IH), 6.40 (m, IH), 4.50 (m,
2H), 3.75 (m, IH), 3.67 (s, 1.5H), 3.61 (s, 1.5H), 1.45 (d, 3H), 1.31 (m,
3H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 173.5, 173.2, 173.0, 172.8, 146.3, 146.2, 132.6, 130.6, 130.5, 121.2, 114.9, 114.7, 113.3, 113.0, 54.6, 54.5, 52.43, 52.39,
47.9, 47.8, 19.3, 19.1 , 17.9, 17.8.
C13H16N2O3Cl2 (MW = 319.19); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 319. Example 11
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-L-alanyI]-L-leucine methyl ester
Following General Procedure D and using L-leucine methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma) and Ν-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine (from Example
A above), the title compound was prepared as a solid (mp = 120-132°C). The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.49 in 1:1 EtOAc: Hexanes) and the product was purified by flash chromatography using 1: 1 EtOAc:Hexanes as the eluent. NMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13) δ = 7.18 (d, IH), 6.95 (bd, IH), 6.69 (d, IH), 6.43 (dd,
IH), 4.58 (m, IH), 4.32 (d, IH), 3.75 (m, IH), 3.61 (s, 3H), 1.54 (m, 6H),
0.90 (m, 6H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 174.1, 173.4, 146.8, 133.3, 131.2, 122.2, 115.7, 114.1, 55.5, 52.9, 51.1, 41.6, 25.5, 23.4, 22.2, 20.0.
C16H22N2O3Cl2 (MW = 361.27); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 361.1.
Example 12
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichIorophenyl)-L-alanyl]-L-phenylalanine methyl ester
Following General Procedure D and using L-phenylalanine methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma) and Ν-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine (from Example A above), the title compound was prepared as a solid (mp = 122-124.5°C). The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.47 in 1: 1 EtOAc: Hexanes) and the product was purified by flash chromatography using 1: 1 EtOAc:Hexanes as the eluent.
NMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13) δ = 7.21 (m, 4H), 7.05 (m, 2H), 6.91(d, IH), 6.64 (d, IH), 6.38 (dd, IH), 4.84 (q, IH), 4.05 (bs, IH), 3.71 (m, 4H), 3.20 (m, IH),
3.04 (m, IH), 1.37 (d, 3H).
I3C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 173.6, 172.1, 146.5, 136.2, 133.4, 131.2, 129.7, 129.1, 127.7, 122.3, 115.6, 113.9, 55.4, 53.3, 53.0, 38.1, 19.9. C19H20N2O3C12 (MW = 395.29); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 395.
Example 13
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichIorophenyI)-D,L-aIanyl]-L-isoleucine methyl ester
Following General Procedure D (without the IN HCI wash) and using L- isoleucine methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma) and Ν-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L- alanine (from Example A above), the title compound was prepared as a solid (mp = 95.5-101.5°C). The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.62 in 1:1
EtOAc: Hexanes) and the product was purified by flash chromatography using 1: 1 EtOAc:Hexanes as the eluent.
NMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13) δ = 7.21 (d, IH), 6.98 (m, IH), 6.70 (m, IH), 6.45 (m, IH), 4.55 (m, IH), 4.11 (m, IH), 3.79 (m, IH), 3.72 (s, 1.5H), 3.67 (s,
1.5H), 1.87 (m, IH), 1.51 (d, 3H), 1.10 (m, 8H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 173.8, 173.4, 172.9, 172.4, 146.6, 146.4, 133.6, 133.4, 131.30, 131.28, 122.5, 122.4, 115.8, 115.4, 114.1, 113.8, 56.9, 56.8, 55.7, 55.5, 52.8, 52.7, 38.3, 38.2, 25.6, 25.5, 20.2, 20.0, 16.05, 16.03, 12.1, 12.0.
C16H22N2O3Cl2 (MW = 361.27); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 361.1.
Example 14
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-L-alanyl]-(S)-2-aminopentanoicacid methyl ester
Following General Procedure D (without the IN HCI wash) and using L- norvaline methyl ester hydrochloride (Sennchem) and Ν-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)- D,L-alanine (from Example A above), the title compound was prepared as a solid (mp = 150-153°C). The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.57 in 1: 1
EtOAc: Hexanes) and the product was purified by flash chromatography using 1: 1 EtOAc: Hexanes as the eluant.
NMR data was as follows: Η-nmr (CDC13) δ = 7.21 (d, IH), 6.95 (bd, IH), 6.70 (d, IH), 6.47 (dd, IH), 4.57 (m, IH), 4.13 (bd, IH), 3.78 (m, IH), 3.67 (s, 3H), 1.81 (m, IH), 1.62 (m, IH), 1.51 (d, 3H), 1.30 (m, 2H), 0.9 (t, 3H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 173.8, 173.0, 146.6, 133.4, 131.3, 122.4, 115.7, 114.1, 55.6, 52.9, 52.4, 34.8, 20.2, 19.2, 14.2.
C15H20N2O3C12 (MW = 347.24); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 347.
Example 15
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-L-alanyl]-(S)-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
Following General Procedure D (without the IN HCI wash) and using L- norleucine methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma) and Ν-(3,4- dichlorophenyl)alanine (from Example A above), the title compound was prepared as a solid (mp = 163-165°C). The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.55 in 1: 1 EtOAc: Hexanes) and the product was purified by flash chromatography using 1: 1 EtOAc:Hexanes as the eluent. NMR data was as follows: Η-nmr (CDC13) δ = 7.18 (d, IH, 7 = 8.7 Hz), 6.99 (bd, IH, 7 = 8.2
Hz), 6.69 (d, IH, 7 = 2.7 Hz), 6.45 (dd, IH, 7 = 8.7 Hz, 7 = 2.7 Hz), 4.53 (m, IH), 4.23 (d, IH, 7 = 4.2 Hz), 3.77 (m, IH), 3.66 (s, 3H), 1.83 (m, IH), 1.62 (m, IH), 1.48 (d, 3H, 7 = 7.0 Hz), 1.27 (m, 4H), 0.85 (t, 3H).
I3C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 173.9, 173.1, 146.7, 133.4, 131.2, 122.3, 115.7, 114.1, 55.5, 52.9, 52.6, 32.4, 28.0, 22.8, 20.1 , 14.4.
C16H22N2O3Cl2 (MW = 361.27); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 361.
Example 16
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-L-tryptophan methyl ester
Following General Procedure D (without the IN HCI wash) and using L- tryptophan methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma) and Ν-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L- alanine (from Example A above), the title compound was prepared as a solid (mp = 54-66°C). The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.43 in 1: 1 EtOAc:Hexanes) and the product was purified by flash chromatography using 1: 1 EtOAc: Hexanes as the eluent.
NMR data was as follows: Η-nmr (CDC13) δ = 8.15 (bs, 0.5H), 7.98 (bs, 0.5H), 7.51 (d, 0.5H),
7.12 (m, 6H), 6.60 (d, 0.5H), 6.53 (dd, IH), 6.24 (m, IH), 4.88 (m, IH), 3.90 (d, 0.5H), 3.70 (m, 4.5H), 3.32 (m, IH), 3.22 (m, IH), 1.40 (m, 3H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 173.8, 173.6, 172.8, 172.4, 146.4, 146.3, 136.6, 133.3, 133.2, 131.2, 131.1 , 128.2, 127.7, 123.3, 122.8, 122.05, 122.02, 120.3, 120.2, 119.0, 118.7, 115.5, 115.4, 113.8, 113.3, 112.1, 111.9, 110.2,
109.9, 55.3, 55.1 , 53.5, 53.1 , 53.0, 52.9, 27.9, 27.7, 19.8, 19.6.
C2IH21N3O3Cl2 (MW = 434.33); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 434.
Example 17 Synthesis of
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-L-aspartic acid β-(tert-butyl ester) α-methyl ester
Following General Procedure D (without the IN HCI wash) and using L- aspartic acid β-(tert-butyl ester) α-methyl ester hydrochloride (Bachem) and Ν- (3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine (from Example A above), the title compound was prepared. The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.56 in 1: 1 EtOAc: Hexanes) and the product was purified by flash chromatography using 1: 1 EtOAc:Hexanes as the eluent. ΝMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13) δ = 7.52 (d, 0.5H), 7.42 (d, 0.5H), 7.13 (m, IH), 6.66 (d, 0.5H), 6.60 (d, 0.5H), 6.40 (m, IH), 4.76 (m, IH), 4.40 (d, 0.5H), 4.31 (d, 0.5H), 3.75 (m, IH), 3.69 (s, 1.5H), 3.62 (s, 1.5H), 2.88 (m, IH), 2.62 (m, IH), 1.47 (m, 3H), 1.32 (s, 4.5H), 1.21 (s, 4.5H). 13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 174.0, 173.7, 171.7, 171.4, 170.30, 170.27, 146.7,
146.6, 133.4, 133.3, 131.2, 131.1, 122.0, 115.6, 115.1, 114.0, 113.4, 82.4, 55.4, 55.2, 53.24, 53.19, 49.0, 48.7, 37.9, 37.8, 28.4, 28.2, 19.9, 19.8. C18H24Ν2O5Cl2 (MW = 419.31); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 418. Example 18
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-L-asparticacid α-methyl ester The tert-butyl ester group of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-L- aspartic acid β-(tert-butyl ester) α-methyl ester (from Example 17 above) was removed via General Procedure F to provide for the title compound as a solid (mp = 53.5-56°C). The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.54 in 1: 1 EtOAc: Hexanes). ΝMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13) δ = 7.59 (d, IH), 7.18 (m, IH), 6.79 (d, 0.5 H), 6.69 (d, 0.5H), 6.58 (m, 0.5H), 6.47 (m, 0.5H), 4.84 (m, IH), 3.82 (m, IH), 3.73 (s, 1.5H), 3.68 (s, 1.5H), 3.04 (m, IH), 2.79 (m, 0.5H), 2.73 (m, 0.5H), 1.49 (m, 3H). 13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 175.7, 175.6, 175.14, 175.07, 171.1, 171.0, 145.0,
144.6, 133.6, 133.5, 131.44, 131.40, 124.2, 123.4, 55.9, 55.4, 53.8, 53.7, 49.05, 49.00, 36.1 , 19.2, 19.1.
C14H16Ν2O3Cl2 (MW = 363.20); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 363.
Example 19
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichIorophenyl)-D,L-aIanyl]-Ne-BOC-L-lysine methyl ester
Following General Procedure D and using N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L- alanine (from Example A above) and Ne-BOC-L-lysine methyl ester hydrochloride (Bachem), the title compound was prepared as a oil. The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.23 in 45% ethyl acetate/hexanes).
ΝMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13): δ = 7.22 (m, 4H), 6.63 (q, IH), 6.43 (m, IH), 4.72 (t, 0.5H), 4.63 (t, 0.5H), 4.53 (m, IH), 4.42 (q, IH), 3.78 (m, IH), 3.68 (s, 1.5H), 3.62 (d, 1.5H), 3.00 (m, 2H), 1.90-1.05 (m, 4H), 1.48 (d, 3H), 1.42
(s, 9H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 174.2, 173.9, 173.1, 172.8, 156.7, 156.6, 146.8,
146.7, 133.4, 133.3, 131.2, 131.1, 121.9, 121.8, 115.5, 115.1, 114.0, 113.8, 79.7, 79.6, 60.9, 55.2, 55.1 , 53.0, 52.9, 52.4, 52.1, 40.6, 40.5, 32.3, 32.2, 30.1, 28.9, 22.8, 21.6, 19.9, 14.7.
Example 20 Synthesis of
N-[N-benzothiazol-6-yl)-D,L-alanyl]-(S)-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
Step A: Synthesis of N-[N-benzothiazoI-6-yl)-D,L-alanine A solution of 1 gram of 6-aminobenzothiazole (Lancaster) in 60 mL of dichloromethane was treated with 0.63 grams of pyridine and then 2.1 grams of trifluoroacetic acid anhydride at room temperature. The reaction was stirred for 3 hours during which time the initially warm reaction mixture cooled to room temperature. The mixture was washed with a 5 % aqueous citric acid solution, dried with MgS04 and the solvents removed to provide a quantitative yield of 6-aminobenzotriazole trifluoroacetamide as a cream colored solid that was used immediately in the following reaction.
A 300 mg portion of 6-aminobenzotriazole trifluoroacetamide was dissolved in 35 mL of THF and added to 1.2 eq. of KH at room temperature. The solution was refluxed for 5 hours, cooled and a crystal of 18-crown-6 (Aldrich) was added along with 331 mg of ethyl 2-bromopropionate (Aldrich) and the resulting mixture was refluxed for 36 hours. The reaction mixture was cooled, the solvents removed under reduced pressure and the residue dissolved in ethyl acetate. The organics were washed with water. The aqueous layer pH was adjusted to pH 5 and extracted with ethyl acetate. The organics were combined, dried with MgSO4 and the solvents removed. The crude material was purified by preparative tic using dichloromethane/methanol (94:4) to give Ν-(benzothiazol-6-yl)-D,L-alanine ethyl ester (Rf = 0.5). This material was treated with methanol and 5 eq. of potassium carbonate at reflux, and then cooled and the solvents removed. The residue was taken up in water and ethyl acetate. The aqueous layer was adjusted to pH 2 and extracted with ethyl acetate. The ethyl acetate extracts were dried and the solvents removed to provide N-(benzothiazol-6-yl)-D,L-alanine.
Step B: Synthesis of N-[N-benzothiazol-6-yl)-D,L-alanyl]-(S)-2- aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
Following General Procedure D (using DMF as the reaction solvent, ethyl acetate for extraction and without the IN HCI wash) and using L-norleucine methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma) and N-(benzothiazol-6-yl)-D,L-alanine (from Step A above), the title compound was prepared. The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.28 in 1: 1 EtOAc:Hexanes) and the product was purified by flash chromatography using 1 : 1 EtOAc:Hexanes as the eluent.
ΝMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13) δ = 8.74 (s, IH), 7.91 (s, IH, 7 = 8.8 Hz), 7.15 (m, IH), 7.06 (d, 0.5H, 7 = 2.3 Hz), 7.00 (d, 0.5H, 7 = 2.3 Hz), 6.87 (m, IH),
4.58 (m, IH), 4.20 (bs, 2H), 3.87 (m, IH), 3.70 (s, 1.5H), 3.59 (s, 1.5H), 1.30 (m, 10H), 0.84 (t, 1.5H, 7 = 6.9 Hz), 0.60 (t, 1.5H, 7 = 6.9H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 174.3, 174.0, 173.4, 173.0, 151.1, 151.0, 147.2, 145.5, 145.3, 136.2, 136.1 , 124.4, 124.2, 116.1, 115.9, 104.6, 103.9, 56.2, 55.69, 53.0, 52.9, 52.5, 52.2, 32.42, 32.36, 28.0, 27.7, 22.8, 22.6, 20.3, 20.1, 14.4, 14.2.
C17H23Ν3O3S2 (MW = 349.46); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 350.
Example 21 Synthesis of
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-aIanyl]-L-lysine methyl ester
Following General Procedure F and using N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L- alanyl]-Ne-BOC-L-lysine methyl ester (from Example 19 above), the title compound was prepared as an oil. The reaction product was purified by silica gel chromatography using 89: 10: 1 CH2Cl2:MeOH:ΝH4OH.
NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13 - 2 diastereomers): δ = 7.21 (d, IH), 7.09 (bd, IH), 6.68 (q, IH), 6.46 (m, IH), 4.56 (m, IH), 4.22 (bs, IH), 3.78 (m, IH), 3.70 (s, 1.5H), 3.67 (s, 1.5H), 2.66 (t, IH), 2.54 (t, IH), 1.80 (m, IH), 1.62 (m, IH), 1.51 (d, 1.5H), 1.50 (d, 1.5H), 1.32 (m, 2H), 1.11 (m, IH).
13C-nmr (CDC13 - 2 diastereomers): δ = 174.8, 174.3, 173.1, 172.8, 171.8, 146.9, 146.7, 133.3, 133.1, 131.2, 131.1, 121.7, 121.5, 115.2, 115.1, 113.9, 113.8, 60.9, 55.0, 54.9, 53.1, 53.0, 52.5, 52.3, 32.1, 32.09, 32.05,
31.8, 23.1, 22.9, 21.6, 19.9, 19.8, and 14.7.
C16HBN3O3Cl2 (MW = 376.28).
Example 22 Synthesis of
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyI)-D,L-alanyl]-L-tyrosine methyl ester
Following General Procedure D and using L-tyrosine methyl ester (Sigma) and Ν-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine (from Example A above), the title compound was prepared as a mixture of stereoisomers about alanine. The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.29 in 10% MeOH/CH^y and purification was by flash chromatography (10% methanol/methylene chloride). NMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13) δ = 7.22 - 7.50 (m, 7H), 6.36 (dd, 0.5H), 6.28 (dd, 0.5H), 4.83 (m IH), 4.04 (dd, IH), 3.73 (s, 1.5H), 3.70 (m, IH), 3.68 (s,
1.5H), 3.14 (dd, 0.5H), 2.97 (m, 1.5H), 1.43 (d, 1.5H), 1.35 (d, 1.5H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 174.20, 174.08, 172.75, 172.26, 156.10, 155.99, 146.45, 146.32, 133.50, 133.38, 131.39, 131.26, 130.81, 130.67, 127.43, 127.00, 122.41 , 122.22, 116.15, 116.12, 115.68, 115.39, 113.94, 113.46, 55.47, 55.08, 53.54, 53.18, 37.62, 37.44, 19.91, 19.87.
C19H20N2O4C12 (MW = 411.28).
Example 23
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-aIanyl]-L-alanine methyl ester
Following General Procedure D and using Ν-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-D,L- alanine (from Example B above) and L-alanine methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma), the title compound was prepared as a oil. The reaction product was purified by silica gel chromatography using 50% ethyl acetate/hexane.
NMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13): δ = 1.3-1.55 (three sets of doublets at 1.34, 1.39 and 1.48, all 7 = 7, total 6H), 3.7-3.9 (m with singlets at 3.67 and 3.72, 4H),
4.3-4.4 (m, IH), 4.5-4.65 (m, IH), 6.4-6.6 (m, 2H), 6.73 (s, IH), 6.95-7.1 (m, IH).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 15.52, 15.59, 16.75, 16.87, 45.29, 45.39, 50.02, 51.89, 51.99, 108.9, 109.2, 109.5, 116.14, 116.19, 132.96, 133.96, 133.05, 145.67, 145.76, 170.13, 170.32, 170.40, 170.63.
C13H16N2O3Cl2 (MW = 319.19); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 319.
Example 24
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,5-dichIorophenyI)-L-aIanyl]-(S)-2-aminopentanoic acid methyl ester
Following General Procedure D and using Ν-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-D,L- alanine (from Example B above) and L-norvaline methyl ester hydrochloride (Sennchem), the title compound was prepared. The reaction product was purified by silica gel chromatography using 50% ethyl acetate/hexane.
NMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13): δ = 0.92 (t, 7 = 7, 3H), 1.2-1.4 (m, 2H), 1.50 (d, 7 = 7, 3H), 1.5-1.7 (m, IH), 1.75-1.9 (m, IH), 3.69 (s, 3H), 3.75-3.9 (m, IH), 4.2 (bs, IH), 4.5-4.65 (m, IH), 6.5 (bs, 2H), 6.73 (s, IH), 6.85 (bs, IH).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 14.2, 19.25, 20.13, 34.8, 52.4, 53.0, 55.2, 112.7, 119.5, 136.1, 148.7, 173.0, 173.5.
C15H20N2O3C12 (MW = 347.24); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 346. Example 25
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-L-alanyl]-L-phenylaIanine methyl ester
Following General Procedure D and using Ν-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-D,L- alanine and L-phenylalanine methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma), the tide compound was prepared. The reaction product was purified by silica gel chromatography using 50% ethyl acetate/hexane.
NMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13): δ = 1.40 (d, 7 = 7, 3H), 3.10 (dd, 7 = 7, 14, IH), 3.23 (dd, 7 = 5, 14, IH), 3.74 (s, 3H), 3.75-3.9 (m, IH), 4.0 (bs, IH), 4.8-
4.95 (m, IH), 6.45 (bs, 2H), 6.73 (s, 2H), 7.0-7.2 (m, 2H), 7.2-7.3 (m, 5H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 19.4, 37.5, 52.4, 52.7, 54.5, 112.0, 118.9, 127.1, 128.5, 129.1, 135.5, 135.6, 148.0, 171.4, 172.6.
C19H20N2O3C12 (MW = 395.29); mass spectroscopy (MHT) 394.
Example 26
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-L-aspartic acid /Mmethyl ester) α-methvl ester
Following General Procedure D (without the IN HCI wash) and using L- aspartic acid /3-(methyl ester) α-methyl ester (Sigma) and Ν-(3,4- dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine (from Example A above), the title compound was prepared as a solid (mp = 113.5-118°C). The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.29 in 1: 1 EtOAc: Hexanes) and the product was purified by flash chromatography using 1: 1 EtOAc: Hexanes as the eluent.
NMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13) δ = 7.47 (bd, IH), 7.20 (m, IH), 6.69 (d, 0.5H), 6.60 (d, 0.5H), 6.44 (m, IH), 4.83 (m, IH), 4.25 (bs, 0.5H), 4.18 (bs, 0.5H), 3.79 (m, IH), 3.72 (s, 1.5H), 3.67 (s, 1.5H), 3.65 (s, 1.5H), 3.48 (s, 1.5H), 3.00
(m, IH), 2.79 (m, IH), 1.50 (m, 3H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 174.0, 173.6, 172.0, 171.7, 171.4, 171.3, 146.6, 146.4, 133.43, 133.37, 131.22, 131.20, 122.2, 122.0, 115.5, 115.0, 114.1, 113.6, 55.4, 55.2, 53.46, 53.44, 52.7, 52.5, 48.8, 48.7, 36.4, 36.3, 19.9, 19.7.
C15H18N2O5Cl2 (MW = 377.23); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 377.
Example 27
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyI)-D,L-alanyl]-(N'-l-benzyl)-L-histidinemethyl ester
Following General Procedure D (without the IN HCI wash) and using 1- benzyl-L-histidine methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma) and Ν-(3,4- dichlorophenyl)-D,L- alanine (from Example A above), the title compound was prepared as a solid (mp = 49-51 °C). The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.21 in 5% methanol/methylene chloride) and the product was purified by flash chromatography using 5% methanol: ethylene chloride as the eluent. NMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13) δ = 8.22 (d, 0.5H), 7.88 (d, 0.5H), 7.29 (m, 3H), 7.08 (m, 4H), 6.65 (d, 0.5H), 6.44 (m, 2.5H), 4.90 (s, IH), 4.86 (s, IH), 4.62 (m, IH), 4.47 (m, IH), 3.72 (m, IH), 3.61 (s, 1.5H), 3.47 (s, 1.5H), 2.95 (m, 2H), 1.42 (d, 3H). 13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 174.0, 173.9, 172.4, 172.0, 146.9, 138.1 , 137.9,
137.6, 136.7, 136.5, 133.1 , 133.0, 131.0, 130.9, 129.6, 129.5, 128.84, 128.79, 127.74, 127.71, 121.1 , 121.0, 117.3, 115.3, 115.1, 113.9, 113.6, 54.9, 54.8, 53.2, 52.9, 52.8, 52.7, 51.3, 51.2, 30.2, 29.8, 19.8. C23H24N4O3Cl2 (MW = 475.38); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 475.
Example 28
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-L-glutamic acid β-(tert-b ty\ ester) α-methyl ester
Following General Procedure D (without the IN HCI wash) and using L- glutamic acid β-(tert-butyl ester) α-methyl ester hydrochloride (Bachem) and Ν- (3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine (from Example A above), the title compound was prepared as an oil. The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.52 and 0.59 in 1: 1 EtOAc: Hexanes) and the product was purified by flash chromatography using 1: 1 EtOAc: Hexanes as the eluent.
NMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13) δ = 7.25 (m, 2H), 6.69 (m, IH), 6.45 (m, IH), 4.54 (m, IH), 3.78 (m, IH), 3.70 (s, 1.5H), 3.65 (s, 1.5H), 2.10 (m, 4H), 1.49 (d,
3H), 1.40 (s, 9H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 174.2, 173.9, 172.8, 172.7, 172.5, 172.3, 146.6,
146.5, 133.5, 133.3, 131.3, 131.2, 122.16, 122.14, 115.7, 115.4, 114.0,
113.6, 81.6, 81.5, 55.4, 55.2, 53.1 , 53.0, 52.3, 51.9, 32.0, 31.7, 28.6, 27.6, 27.3, 20.0, 19.8.
C19H26N2O5Cl2 (MW = 433.34); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 432.
Example 29
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-L-glutamicacid α-methyl ester
The tert-butyl ester group of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]glutamic acid 3-(tert-butyl ester) α-methyl ester (from Example 28 above) was removed via General Procedure F (the ΝaHCO3 wash was omitted and the product was recovered from the ethyl acetate phase) to provide for the title compound as a solid (mp = 42-45°C). The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.42 and 0.50 in 10% methanol/methylene chloride).
NMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13) δ = 7.57 (bs, IH), 7.25 (d, IH), 6.75 (d, IH), 6.51 (m, IH), 4.67 (m, IH), 3.91 (m, IH), 3.76 (s, 1.5H), 3.69 (s, 1.5H), 2.50-2.15
(m, 3H), 2.10-1.85 (m, IH), 1.51 (bs, 3H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 177.98, 177.73, 175.17, 174.94, 172.64, 172.26, 146.60 , 146.45, 133.52, 133.33, 131.41 , 131.27, 122.32, 122.28, 115.68, 155.47, 113.98, 113.59, 55.37, 55. 17, 53.35, 53.29, 52.20, 51.85, 30.68, 30.26, 227.29, 27.18, 19.86, 19.77.
C15H18N2O5Cl2 (MW = 377.23). Example 30
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-L-alanyl]-L-leucine amide Following General Procedure D and using L-leucinamide hydrochloride
(Sigma) and Ν-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine (from Example A above), the title compound was prepared. This compound was then purified by column chromatography, eluted first with 1: 1 EtOAc/hexane, then with 5% MeOH in methylene chloride. NMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13) δ = 7.32 (d, 8.6, IH), 7.17 (d, 8.7, IH), 6.66 (d, 2.7, IH), 6.54 (s, IH), 6.41 (dd, 2.7, 8.7, IH), 6.13 (s, IH), 4.48 (m, IH), 4.33 (d, 5.3, IH), 3.83 (quint, 6.9, IH), 1.58 (m, 3H), 1.44 (d, 7.0, 3H), 0.89 (d, 6.0, 3H), 0.85 (d, 5.9, 3H). 13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 174.5, 173.9, 146.0, 132.8, 130.7, 121.5, 114.7,
113.3, 54.3, 51.1, 40.8, 24.8, 22.9, 21.7, 19.2.
C15H21N3O2Cl2 (MW = 346.26); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 346.
Example 31 Synthesis of
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyI]-(3,5-diiodo)-L-tyrosinemethyI ester
Following General Procedure D and using 3,5-diiodo-L-tyrosine methyl ester hydrochloride (Bachem) and Ν-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine (from Example A above), the title compound was prepared as a mixture of stereoisomers about alanine. The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.29 in 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2) and purification was by flash chromatography (10% methanol/methylene chloride). NMR data was as follows: Η-nmr (CDC13 - partially pure diastereomer A) δ = 7.37 (s, 2H), 7.19
(d, IH), 6.99 (bd, IH), 6.65 (d, IH), 6.40 (m, IH), 5.78 (s, IH), 4.73 (q, IH), 3.72 (m, IH), 0.70 (s, 3H). l3C-nmr (CDC13 -- two diastereomers): δ = 173.86, 171.87, 171.41, 171.37, 170.90, 153.48, 150.74, 146.37, 146.30, 141.01, 140.09, 138.39, 133.50, 133.45, 132.14, 131.62, 131.34, 131.28, 122.80, 122.62, 121.82, 115.89, 115.78, 115.72, 115.47, 114.54, 113.79, 113.21, 82.92, 77.08, 61.01, 55.69, 53.32, 53.28, 53.18, 53.14, 52.97, 52.90, 52.76, 36.37, 36.15, 21.67,
20.20, 20.11, 19.76, 14.79.
C19H18N2O4Cl2I2 (MW = 663.08); mass spectroscopy (MH+) = 663.
Example 32 Synthesis of
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-(3-iodo)-L-tyrosine methyl ester
Following General Procedure D and using 3-iodo-L-tyrosine methyl ester hydrochloride (prepared following General Procedure K and using 3-iodo- L-tyrosine (Aldrich)) and Ν-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine (from Example A above), the title compound was prepared as a mixture of stereoisomers about alanine. The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.29 in 10% MeOH/CH2Cl2) and purification was by flash chromatography (10% methanol/methylene chloride). NMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13) δ = 7.37 - 7.20 (m, 3H), 6.97 - 6.60 (m, 3H), 6.42 (dd, 1.5H), 6.32 (dd, 1.5H), 5.52 (bs, 0.5H), 5.43 (bs, 0.5H), 4.80 (m, IH), 3.94 (dd, IH), 3.73 (s, 1.5H), 3.70 (s, 1.5H), 3.12 (dd, 0.5H), 2.94 (m, 1.5H), 1.48 (d, 1.5H), 1.43 (d, 1.5H). 13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 173.56, 171.80, 171033, 154.52, 154.47,
145.69, 139.15, 138.74, 132.88, 132.71, 130.83, 130.61, 130.40, 130.26, 129.14, 128.81, 121.76, 121.73, 115.04, 114.97, 114.86, 113.20, 112.71, 84.96, 84.68, 54.85, 54.65, 52.78, 52.60, 52.57, 52.51 , 36.29, 36.08, 19.40, 19.27. C19H19N2O4Cl2I (MW = 537.18); mass spectroscopy (MH+) = 538. Example 33
Following the General Procedures and Examples described herein, the following compound could be prepared:
N-[N-(4-chlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-L-phenylalanine methyl ester
Example 34
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)glycyl]-(S)-2-aminopentanoicacid methyl ester Following General Procedure D and using Ν-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)glycine
(from Example I above) and L-norvaline methyl ester hydrochloride (Sennchem), the title compound was prepared. The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.32 in 50% ethyl acetate/hexanes) and purification was by silica gel chromatography using ethyl acetate/hexanes as the eluent. NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13) δ = 7.21 (d, J = 8.7, IH), 6.94 (d, J = 7.8, IH), 6.68 (d, J = 2.6, IH), 6.4 (m, IH), 4.6 (m, 2H), 3.79 (d, J = 2.6, 2H), 3.71 (s, 3H), 1.7 (m, 2H), 1.2 (m, 2H), 0.88 (t, J = 7.3, 7.3, 3H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 173.3, 170.2, 147.2, 133.6, 131.3, 122.2, 115.0, 113.6, 53.0, 52.3, 48.8, 34.8, 19.2, 14.1.
C14H18N2O3Cl2 (MW = 333.22); mass spectroscopy (MH+) = 334.
Example 35
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-Ne-(hexanoyl)-L-lysine methyl ester
Following General Procedure D and using N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)- D,L-alanyl]-L-lysine methyl ester (from Example 21 above) and hexanoic acid (Aldrich), the title compound was prepared. The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.38 in 60% CH2CH2/10% hexanes/ 27% EtOAc/ 3% MeOH) and purification was by flash chromatography using 60% CH2CH2/10% hexanes/ 27% EtOAc/ 3 % MeOH as the eluent.
ΝMR data was as follows: Η-nmr (CDC13) δ = 7.70 (d), 7.25 (m), 7.15 (m), 6.68 (m), 6.42 (m),
5.95 (bs), 5.79 (bs), 4.70 (bs), 4.50 (m), 3.80 (m), 3.78 (s), 3.72 (s), 3.45
(m), 3.20 (m), 3.05 (m), 2.12 (m), 1.98 (m), 1.80 (m), 1.60 (m), 1.45 (m),
1.30 (m), 1.10 (m). 13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 175.6, 174.4, 174.0, 173.9, 173.7, 173.1, 156.6,
146.9, 146.8, 133.5, 133.2, 131.2, 131.1, 121.7, 115.4, 115, 23, 115.1,
114.0, 113.9, 79.6, 55.1 , 54.9, 54.8, 53.0, 52.9, 52.4, 52.0, 42.6, 40.9, 39.4,
37.1, 32.1 , 31.7, 30.3, 29.4, 28.9, 28.5, 26.9, 25.9, 25.9, 23.0, 19.9, 19.7.
C22H33N3O4Cl2 (MW = 474.43); mass spectroscopy (MH+) = NA.
Example 36
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-L-phenyIalanine amide Following General Procedure D and using phenylalanine amide
(Bachem) and Ν-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine (from Example A above), the title compound was prepared as a solid (mp = 177-179°C). This compound was then purified by trituration with chloroform. NMR data was as follows: Η-nmr (OMSO-d6) δ = 8.0-8.2 (d, IH), 7.45 (m, IH), 7.05-7.30 (m,
7H), 7.65-7.72 (m, IH), 6.24-6.51 (m, 2H), 4.45 (m, IH), 3.82 (m, IH), 2.95 (m, IH), 2.78 (m, IH), 1.05-1.25 (m, 3H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 173.0, 172.9, 172.8, 172.7, 147.9, 137.7, 131.1, 130.3, 129.21 , 129.15, 128.0, 127.9, 126.21, 126.19, 116.8, 113.5, 113.0, 112.6, 53.4, 53.3, 52.0, 51.8, 37.92, 37.86, 18.9, 18.6.
C18H19N3O2Cl2 (MW = 380.28); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 380.
Example 37
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-(S)-2-aminohexan-(N-methyl)-amide
Following General Procedure D and using L-norleucine N-methyl amide (prepared by coupling BOC-L-norleucine (Bachem) with methylamine (Aldrich) using General Procedure E, followed by removal of the BOC group using
General Procedure F) and N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine, the tide compound was prepared. This compound was then purified by washing with aqueous potassium carbonate. NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CD3OD) δ = 6.99 (t, IH), 6.48 (d, 10.8, IH), 6.32 (d, 8.7,
IH), 4.09 (m, IH), 3.68 (q, 7.0, 0.5H), 3.59 (q, 7.1, 0.5H), 2.50 (s, 1.5H),
2.47 (s, 1.5H), 1.28-1.60 (m, 2H), 1.23 (t, 6.5, 3H), 0.80-1.20 (m, 4H), 0.68
(t, 6.7, 1.5H), 0.59 (t, 7.1 , 1.5H). 13C-nmr (CD3OD): δ = 176.6 (overlapping), 174.54, 174.51, 148.8,
148.5, 133.6, 133.5, 131.7, 131.6, 121.0, 120.8, 115.2, 115.1, 114.5, 114.2,
55.3, 54.7, 54.3, 54.1, 33.3 (overlapping), 29.0, 28.8, 26.3, 26.2, 23.4, 23.3,
19.0 (overlapping), 14.3, 14.2.
C16H23N3O2Cl2 (MW = 360.29); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 360.
Examples 38 and 39
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-/3-cyclohexylalanine methyl ester Following General Procedure D and using -cyclohexylalanine methyl ester (prepared from -cyclohexylalanine (Bachem) using General Procedure K) and Ν-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine, the title compound, as a mixture of diastereomers about alanine, was prepared as an oil. The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.27 (second isomer) and 0.30 (first isomer) in 35% EtOAc/hexanes) and purification was by flash chromatography (35 %
EtOAc/hexanes).
NMR data was as follows (First Isomer - Example 38): 'H-nmr (CD3OD) δ = 7.21 (d, IH), 6.81 (bd, IH), 6.70 (d, IH), 6.46 (dd, IH), 4.62 (m, IH), 4.19 (d, IH), 3.77 (m, IH), 3.65 (s, 3H), 1.65 - 0.90 (m, 10H), 1.50 (d, 3H). 13C-nmr (CD3OD): δ = 173.78, 173.48, 146.62, 133.45, 131.26, 122.51, 115.84, 114.17, 55.64, 52.91, 50.47, 40.18, 34.81, 34.04, 32.88, 26.86, 26.71, 26.55, 20.13.
NMR data was as follows (Second Isomer — Example 39): 'H-nmr (CD3OD) δ = 7.23 (d, IH), 6.83 (bd, IH), 6.67 (d, IH), 6.45
(dd, IH), 4.63 (m, IH), 4.10 (d, IH), 3.69 (m, IH), 3.72 (s, 3H), 1.65 - 0.90 (m, 10H), 1.51(d, 3H).
13C-nmr (CD3OD): δ = 173.98, 173.56, 146.38, 133.65, 131.34, 122.49, 115.35, 113.78, 55.39, 52.95, 50.21, 40.26, 34.61, 34.10, 32.68, 26.82, 26.64, 26.41 , 19.98.
CI9H26N2O3Cl2 (MW = 401.34); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 401.
Example 40
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-L-aIanyI]-(S)-2-aminohexanamide
Following General Procedure D and using L-norleucine amide (prepared from BOC-L-norleucine amide (from Example F above) using General Procedure F) and Ν-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine, the title compound was prepared as a solid (mp = 156-161 °C). NMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CD3OD) δ = 6.49 (m, IH), 6.32 (m, IH), 1.14 (m, IH), 3.54- 3.71 (m, IH), 0.80-1.62 (m, 9H), 0.68 (m, 1.5H), 0.58 (m, 1.5H).
1 C-nmr (CD3OD): δ = 176.63, 176.56, 148.8, 148.5, 133.6, 133.5, 131.7, 131.6, 120.8, 115.2, 115.1 , 114.4, 114.2, 55.3, 54.7, 53.9, 53.7, 33.4, 33.3, 29.0, 28.6, 23.4, 23.3, 19.03, 18.99, 14.3, 14.2..
C15H21N3O2Cl2 (MW = 346.26); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 346.
Example 41
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-(S)-2-aminohexan-(N,N-dimethyl)- amide Following General Procedure D and using L-norleucine N,N-dimethyl amide (prepared by coupling BOC-L-norleucine (Bachem) with dimethylamine (Aldrich) using General Procedure E, followed by removal of the BOC group using General Procedure F) and N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine, the tide compound was prepared as a solid (mp = 137-160°C). The reaction was monitored by tic (0.20 and 0.24 (5 % MeOH in CH2C12)) and purification of this compound was by precipitation from water.
NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13) δ = 0.77 (m, 3H), 1.11 (m, IH), 1.24 (m, 3H), 1.47 (m, 3H), 1.40-1.80 (m, 2H), 2.92 and 2.94 (two s, 3H), 3.07 (s, 3H), 3.84
(m, IH), 4.32 (d, 7 = 5.3 Hz, IH), 4.90 (m, IH), 6.44 (m, IH), 6.65 (s, IH), 7.17 (m, IH), 7.35 (m, IH).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 13.8, 13.9, 19.3, 19.4, 22.38, 22.45, 27.06, 27.14, 32.3, 32.5, 35.7 (possibly overlapping), 37.0, 37.1, 48.6, 48.8, 54.3, 54.5, 113.1, 113.5, 114.4, 114.7, 121.1, 121.3, 130.6 (overlapping), 132.7,
132.9, 146.0, 146.2, 171.4, 171.5, 172.6, 172.9.
C17H25N3O2Cl2 (MW = 374.31); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 374.
Example 42 Synthesis of
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-L-methionine methyl ester
Following General Procedure D and using L-methionine methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma) and Ν-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine (from Example A above), the title compound was prepared as a mixture of diastereomers. The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.35 in 43% EtOAc/hexanes) and purification of this compound was by flash chromatography with 43 % EtOAc/hexanes.
NMR data was as follows: 'H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 7.21 (d, 2H), 6.68 (m, IH), 6.43 (m, IH), 4.68
(m, IH), 4.21 (dd, IH), 3.79 (m, IH), 3.73 (s, 1.5H), 3.68 (s, 1.5H), 2.46 (m, IH), 2.31 (t, IH), 2.23 - 1.88 (m, 2H), 2.06 (s, 1.5H), 1.93 (s, 1.5H), 1.50 (d, 3H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 174.09, 173.81, 172.73, 172.38, 146.60, 146.47, 133.43, 131.37, 131.27, 122.36, 122.33, 115.65, 115.31, 114.05, 113.65, 55.48, 55.32, 53.19, 53.16, 51.99, 51.68, 31.74, 31.64, 30.62, 30.42, 20.10,
19.92, 16.08, 15.91.
C15H20N2O2C12S (MW = 379.31); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 379.
Example 43 Synthesis of
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-(S)-2-aminohexan-(N,N-dimethyl)- amide
Following General Procedure E and using L-norleucine Ν,Ν-dimethyl amide (prepared by coupling BOC-L-norleucine (Bachem) with dimethylamine
(Aldrich) using General Procedure E, followed by removal of the BOC group using General Procedure F) and N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanine (from Example B above), the title compound was prepared. The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.25-0.30 in 3% methanol/dichloromethane) and purification of this compound was by chromatography with 3% methanol/dichloromethane.
NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 0.8-0.95 (overlapping t, 3H), 1.2-1.8 (m containing overlapping d at 1.45 and 1.48, 9H), 2.95 (s, 3H), 3.10 (s, 3H), 3.8-3.9 (m, IH), 4.3-4.4 (m, IH), 4.8-4.95 (m, IH), 6.45 (s, 2H), 6.6-6.7
(m, IH).
C17H25N3O2Cl2 (MW = 374.31).
Example 44 Synthesis of
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyI]-(S)-2-aminohexanamide
Following General Procedure D and using Ν-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-D,L- alanine (from Example B above) and L-norleucine amide (from Example F above), the title compound was prepared. The reaction was monitored by dc (Rf = 0.15 in 3 % methanol/dichloromethane) and purification of this compound was by thin layer chromatography with 3 % methanol/ dichloromethane. NMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CD3OD): δ = 0.9 (t, 7 = 7, 3H), 1.2-1.4 (m, 2H), 1.45 (d, 7 = 7, 3H), 1.5-1.7 (m, IH), 1.75-1.9 (m, IH), 3.9-4.0 (m, IH), 4.1-4.3 (m, IH), 4.3-4.4 (m, IH), 6.5 (bs, 2H), 6.6 (bs, IH). C15H21N3O2Cl2 (MW = 346.26).
Example 45
Synthesis of
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-(S)-2-aminohexan-(N-methyl)- amide Following General Procedure D and using Ν-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-D,L- alanine and L-norleucine N-methyl amide (prepared by coupling BOC-L- norleucine (Bachem) with methylamine (Aldrich) using General Procedure E, followed by removal of the BOC group using General Procedure F), the title compound was prepared. The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.25 in 3% methanol/dichloromethane) and purification of this compound was by thin layer chromatography with 3% methanol/dichloromethane. ΝMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CD3OD): δ = 0.9 (t, 7 = 7, 3H), 1.2-1.4 (m, 2H), 1.45 (d, 7 = 7, 3H), 1.5-1.7 (m, IH), 1.75-1.9 (m, IH), 2.6-2.7 (m with s at 2.7, 4H), 3.8-4.0 (m, IH), 4.1-4.3 (m, 2H), 6.5 (bs, 2H), 6.6 (bs, IH)
C16H23Ν3O2Cl2 (MW = 360.29).
Example 46
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichIorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-L-histidine methyl ester
Following General Procedure D (without the IN HCI wash) and using
L-histidine methyl ester dihydrochloride (Sigma) and Ν-(3, 4-dichlorophenyl)- D,L-alanine, the title compound was prepared as a solid (mp = 55-60°C). The reaction was monitored by dc (Rf = 0.52 in 10% methanol/methylene chloride) and purification of this compound was by flash chromatography with 50% EtOAc/hexanes. NMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13): δ = 8.14 (bd, 7 = 7.02 Hz, 0.5H), 7.79 (bd, 7.57 Hz, 0.5H), 7.33 (s, IH), 7.14 (m, IH), 6.73 (s, 0.5H), 6.69 (s, 0.5H), 6.59 (m, IH), 6.47 ( , 0.5H), 6.37 (m, 0.5H), 4.74 (m, IH), 4.33 (m, IH), 3.79 (m, IH), 3.69 (s, 1.5H), 3.62 (s, 1.5H), 3.05 (m, 2H), 1.47 (d, 7 = 7.02 Hz, 3H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 174.35, 174.15, 172.45, 172.08, 146.80, 146.67, 135.48, 135.07, 134.65, 133.24, 133.12, 131.13, 131.04, 121.54, 121.49, 115.96, 115.78, 115.38, 115.05, 113.90, 113.72, 61.04, 54.98, 53.11, 52.97, 52.71, 29.71, 19.43, 21.68, 19.86, 19.84, 14.77. C16H18N4O3Cl2 (MW = 385.25); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 385.
Example 47
Synthesis of N-[N-(quinolin-3-yl)-D,L-alanyl]-(S)-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
Using General Procedure G, followed by hydrolysis set forth in General Procedure C, N-(quinolin-3-yl)-D,L-alanine was prepared. This compound was then coupled to L-norleucine methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma) using General Procedure D to provide for the title compound as an oil. The latter reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.76 in 10% methanol/methylene chloride and 0.07 in 1:1 EtOAc:Hexanes and the product was purified by flash chromatography using 10% methanol/methylene chloride as the eluent.
ΝMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13): δ = 8.53 (t, 7 = 2.8 Hz, IH), 7.95 (m, IH), 7.63 (m, IH), 7.46 (m, 2H), 7.20 (m, IH), 7.10 (d, 7 = 2.75 Hz, 0.5H), 7.01 (d,
7 = 2.75 Hz, 0.5H), 4.60 (m, 2H), 3.94 (m, IH), 3.71 (s, 1.5H), 3.54 (s, 1.5H), 1.90-0.80 (m, 12H). 13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 173.82, 173.50 ,173.40, 172.96, 143.65, 143.60, 143.39, 143.32, 140.34, 140.26, 129.57, 129.49, 127.86, 127.78, 126.94, 126.78, 126.54, 113.39, 112.65, 55.69, 55.46, 53.00, 52.86, 52.62, 52.28, 32.42, 32.35, 28.03, 27.79, 22.78, 22.62, 20.22, 20.01, 14.41, 14.12. C^H^NA (MW = 343.43).
Example 48
Synthesis of N-[N-(benzothiazol-2-yl)-L-alanyl]-(S)-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
Following General Procedure B and using 2-chlorobenzothiazole (Aldrich) and L-alanine (Aldrich), N-(benzothiazol-2-yl)-L-alanine was prepared. This compound was then coupled to L-norleucine methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma) using General Procedure D (without the IN HCI wash) to provide for the title compound as a solid (mp = 99-120°C). The latter reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.42 in 1: 1 EtOAc .-Hexanes) and the product was purified by preparative plate chromatography using 1 : 1 EtOAc: Hexanes and 5:95 MeOH: dichloromethane as the eluent. ΝMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 7.66-7.03 (m, 6H), 4.69 (m, IH), 4.58 (m, IH), 3.72 (s, 1.9H), 3.61 (s, 1.1H), 1.91-1.50 (m, 5H), 1.32-1.08 (m, 4H), 0.87- 0.65 (m, 3H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 175.8, 170.3, 166.8, 160.2, 152.3, 148.4, 132.1, 131.1, 126.8, 126.5, 124.5, 122.6, 122.0, 121.4, 120.9, 119.4, 54.3, 54.2,
53.0, 52.9, 3.5, 28.1 , 28.0, 23.9, 22.9, 19.0, 18.8, 14.2.
C17H23Ν3O3S (MW = 349.46); mass spectroscopy (MH+ 350).
Example 49 Synthesis of
N-[N-(3,5-difluorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-L-alanine methyl ester
Following General Procedure E and using L-alanine methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma) and N-(3,5-difluorophenyl)-D, L-alanine (from Example C above), the title compound was prepared as a solid (mp = 93-95 °C). The reaction was monitored by dc (Rf = 0.4 in 3% methanol/methylene chloride) and purification of this compound was by flash chromatography with 3% methanol/methylene chloride. NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 6.9 (q), 6.25 (t), 6.10 (q), 5.3 (s), 4.6 (m), 4.25 (m), 33.7-3.8 (m), 1.8 (s), 1.5 (d), 1.4 (q), 1.25 (s).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 173.78, 173.51, 173.44, 173.27, 166.24, 166.09, 163.04, 162.83, 149.41, 149.37, 97.47, 97.34, 97.20, 97.09, 96.82, 95.08, 95.03, 94.73, 94.69, 94.39, 94.34, 55.27, 55.22, 53.10, 53.02, 48.46, 48.35, 19.99, 19.87, 18.72, 18.66.
C13H16N2O3F2 (MW = 286.3); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 287.
Example 50 Synthesis of
N-[N-(3,5-difluorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-(S)-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
Following General Procedure E and using L-norleucine methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma) and N-(3,5-difluorophenyl)-D, L-alanine, the title compound was prepared as a solid (mp = 93-95 °C). The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.6 in 3% methanol/methylene chloride) and purification of this compound was by flash chromatography with 3% methanol/methylene chloride. ΝMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13): δ = 6.95 (d), 6.85 (d), 6.25 (t), 6.15 (t), 4.6 (m), 4.3 (m), 3.8 (m), 3.75 (s), 3.70 (s), 1.8 (m), 1.65 (m), 1.55 (d), 1.3 (m), 1.1 (m), 0.85 (t), 0.80 (t).
,3C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 173.64, 173.42, 173.35, 173.04, 149.38, 149.23, 97.52, 97.21, 97.14, 96.83, 95.10, 95.05, 94.75, 94.70, 94.41, 77.61, 77.19, 55.34, 55.25, 52.97, 52.87, 52.58, 52.25, 32.41, 27.96, 27.74, 22.79, 22.68, 20.05, 19.87, 14.39, 14.25.
C16H22Ν2O3F2 (MW = 328.3); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 329. Example 51
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyI)-L-aIanyl]-(S)-2-aminohexanamide Following General Procedure D (using DMF as the solvent and ethyl acetate for extraction, and without the IN HCI wash) and using L-norleucine amide (prepared from BOC-L-norleucine amide (from Example F above) using General Procedure F) and Ν-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-L-alanine (prepared from 3,4- dichloroaniline (Aldrich) and isobutyl R-(+)-lactate (Aldrich) using General Procedure J, followed by hydrolysis using General Procedure C), the tide compound was prepared as a solid (mp = 184-186°C). The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.48 in 12% methanol/methylene chloride) and purification of this compound was by preparative plate chromatography using 12% methanol/methylene chloride as eluent. NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CD3OD): δ = 6.97 (d, 7 = 8.79 Hz, IH), 6.51 (d, 7 = 2.68 Hz, IH), 6.32 (dd, 7 = 8.73 Hz, 7 = 2.68 Hz, IH), 4.14 (m, IH), 3.67 (q, 7 = 6.96 Hz, IH), 1.40 (m, 10H), 0.70 (m, 3H)
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 177.19, 177.11 , 149.41, 134.05, 132.13, 121.38, 115.82, 114.96, 55.26, 54.48, 33.92, 29.54, 23.95, 19.58, 14.83.
C15H21N3O2Cl2 (MW = 346.26); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 346.
Example 52
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-(S)-2-aminohexan-
(N-benzyl)-amide
Following General Procedure H above and using N-[N-(3,4- dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-(S)-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester (from Example 15 above) and benzylamine (Aldrich), the title compound was prepared as a solid (mp = 141-146°C). The reaction was monitored by dc on silica gel (Rf = 0.32 in 5% methanol/methylene chloride) and purification was by preparative plate chromatography (silica gel using 5 % methanol/methylene chloride as eluent). NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 7.6 (m, 2H), 7.2 (m, 6H), 6.6 (m, IH), 6.3 (m, IH), 4.47 (m, 4H), 3.75 (m, IH), 1.28 (m, 12H).
,3C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 174.56, 174.50, 172.39, 172.32, 146.78, 146.65, 138.38, 133.43, 133.38, 131.22, 129.21, 128.06, 121.98, 121.72, 121.66,
115.21, 115.08, 113.73, 113.55, 54.94, 54.36, 53.60, 53.22, 43.95, 33.10, 32.98, 28.24, 27.95, 22.96, 22.90, 19.78, 19.70, 14.49, 14.41.
C22H27Cl2N3O2 (MW = 436.39); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 436.
Example 53
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-(S)-2-amino-2-phenylethanoI
Following General Procedure E and using Ν-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L- alanine (from Example A above) and (S)-(+)-2-phenylglycinol (Aldrich), the title compound was prepared as a solid (mp = 66-70 °C). The reaction was monitored by tic on silica gel (Rf = 0.25 in 5% methanol/methylene chloride) and purification was by flash column chromatography (silica gel using 5 % methanol/methylene chloride as eluent).
NMR data was as follows: Η-nmr (CDC13): δ = 7.4-7.1 (m, 6H), 6.75 (d, 7 = 3 Hz, IH), 6.5-
6.4 (m, IH), 5 (m, IH), 4.2-4.0 (m, 7 = 4 Hz, IH), 3.8 (2H), 1.7 (s, IH),
1.55 (m, 3H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 174, 146, 139, 134, 131.8, 129.5, 128:5, 127,
123, 116, 114, 112, 67, 56.5, 55.5, 20. C16H18Cl2N2O2 (MW = 341); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 342.
Examples 54 and 55
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-phenylglycyl]-L-alanine methyl ester
Following General Procedure E and using Ν-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-D,L- phenylglycine (from Example I above) and L-alanine methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma), the title compound was prepared. The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.95 in 3% methanol/methylene chloride) and purification of this compound was by recrystallization from EtOAc, hexane and ether. Two partially separated diastereomeric mixtures were obtained.
NMR data was as follows: 'H-nmr (CDC13 - 75 % isomer A/25% isomer B): δ = 7.45-7.35 (m,
5H), 6.7 (m, 2H), 6.47 (m, 2H), 5.1-5.0 (dd, 7 = 3 Hz, IH), 4.75 (d, J =
3.5 Hz, IH), 4.65-4.5 (m, 7.2 Hz IH), 3.75-3.68 (2 s in a ratio of 3: 1, 3H),
1.43-1.3 (2 d in a ratio of 3: 1, 7 = 7.2 Hz, 3H).
13C-nmr (CDC13 - 75% isomer A/25% isomer B): δ = 173.27, 170.24, 148.61 , 138.23, 136.07, 136.00, 130.11 , 129.60, 129.58, 127.83, 127.69,
119.10, 112.68, 112.56, 78.03, 63.27, 53.20, 48.94, 18.85.
'H-nmr (CDC13 - 25 % isomer A/75% isomer B): δ = 7.45-7.35 (m,
5H), 6.7 (m, 2H), 6.47(m, 2H), 5.1-5.0 (2xd, 7 = 3 Hz, IH), 4.75 (d, 7 =
3.5 Hz, IH), 4.65-4.5 (m, 7 = 7.2 Hz, IH), 3.75-3.68 (2 s in a ratio of 1:3, 3H), 1.43-1.3 (2 d in a ratio of 1:3, 7 = 7.2 Hz, 3H).
13C-nmr (CDC13 -- 25 % isomer A/75% isomer B): δ = 173.27, 170.24,
148.61, 138.23, 136.07, 136.00, 130.11 , 129.60, 129.58, 127.83, 127.69,
119.10, 112.68, 112.56, 78.03, 63.27, 53.20, 48.94, 18.85.
CI8H18N2O3Cl2 (MW = 381.26); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 381.
Example 56
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-(S)-2-aminohexanol Following General Procedure I above and using N-[N-(3,4- dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-(S)-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester (from Example 15 above), the title compound was prepared as an oil. The reaction was monitored by tic on silica gel (Rf = 0.16 and 0.17 in 5% methanol/methylene chloride) and purification was by preparative plate chromatography (silica gel using 5 % methanol/methylene chloride as eluent). ΝMR data was as follows: 'H-nmr (CD3OD): δ = 7.20 (d, IH), 6.79 (m, IH), 6.68 (dd, IH), 6.43 (d, IH), 4.42 (bd, 0.6H), 4.30 (bd, 0.4H), 3.89 (m, IH), 3.75 (m, IH), 3.70-3.40 (m, 2H), 1.60-0.95 (m, 9H), 0.90-0.70 (m, 3H)
13C-nmr (CD3OD): δ = 174.42, 174.17, 146.06, 145.96, 132.89, 132.85, 130.74, 130.69, 121.64, 121.49, 114.98, 114.70, 113.14, 113.08,
65.42, 65.11, 55.00, 54.76, 51.69, 51.48, 30.67, 30.59, 28.16, 28.00, 22.48, 22.36, 19.44, 13.92, 13.82.
C15H22Cl2N2O2 (MW = 333.26); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 333.
Example 57
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-(S)-2-amino-2-phenylethanol
Following General Procedure E and using Ν-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-D,L- alanine (from Example B above) and (S)-(- )-2-phenylglycinol (Aldrich), the title compound could be prepared.
Example 58
Synthesis of N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyI)-L-alanyI]-L-phenylglycinetø/f-butyl ester
Following General Procedure D (without the IN HCI wash) and using N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-L-alanine (prepared from 3,5-dichloroaniline (Aldrich) and isobutyl R-(+)-lactate (Aldrich) using General Procedure J, followed by hydrolysis using General Procedure C) and L-phenylglycine tert-butyl ester hydrochloride (Bachem), the title compound was prepared. The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.39 in 25% EtOAc/Hexanes) and purification of this compound was by preparative plate chromatography using 25 % EtOAc/Hexanes. ΝMR data was as follows:
Η-nmr (CDC13): δ = 7.55 (d, 7 = 7.39 Hz, IH), 7.30 (s, 5H), 6.73 (t, 7 = 1.68 Hz, IH), 6.46 (d, 7 = 1.71 Hz, 2H), 5.45 (d, 7 = 7.45 Hz, IH), 4.47 (d, 7 = 5.19 Hz, IH), 3.82 (m, IH), 1.40 (d, 7 = 6.96 Hz, 3H), 1.34 (s, 9H).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 173.23, 169.92, 148.93, 137.43, 136.07, 129.40, 128.85, 127.40, 119.04, 112.48, 83.42, 57.37, 54.70, 28.29, 19.79. C21H24N2O3Cl2 (MW = 423.34); mass spectroscopy (MH+) 423.
Example 59
Synthesis of
N-[N-(3,5-di-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-L-alanyl]-L-phenyIglycine tert-b tyl ester
Following General Procedure D and using N-[3,5-di- (trifluoromethyl)phenyl]-L-alanine (from Example G above) and L- phenylglycine tert-butyl ester hydrochloride (Bachem), the title compound was prepared. The reaction was monitored by tic (Rf = 0.46 in 25 % EtOAc/Hexanes).
ΝMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 7.39 (d, 7 = 7.39 Hz, IH), 7.29 (s, 5H), 6.96 (s, 2H), 5.45 (d, 7 = 7.51 Hz, IH), 4.69 (d, 7 = 5.31 Hz, IH), 3.95 (m, IH),
1.48 (d, 7 = 6.96 Hz, 3H), 1.33 (s, 9H). 13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 172.7, 169.9, 147.9, 137.3, 132.8, 132.4,
129.42, 129.34, 129.31 , 128.9, 127.4, 127.2, 127, 122.1, 113.50, 113.47, 112.34, 112.29, 112.24, 83.5, 57.3, 54.6, 28.34, 28.30, 28.2, 19.8. C23H24Ν2O3F6 (MW = 490.45).
Example 60
Synthesis of
N-[N-(3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)-D,L-alanyI]-(S)-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
Following General Procedure E (washing with dilute HCI and extracting with EtOAc) and using N-(3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)-D, L-alanine (from Example H above) and L-norleucine methyl ester hydrochloride (Sigma), the title compound was prepared as a light yellow oil. The reaction was monitored by dc (Rf = 0.3 in 30% EtOAc/Hexanes).
NMR data was as follows:
'H-nmr (CDC13): δ = 0.6-0.9 (two triplets at 0.72 and 0.82, 7 = 7 Hz, 3H), 1.0-1.9 (m, 9H), 3.6-3.7 (four singlets at 3.60, 3.65, 3.66 and 3.67,
10H), 3.7-3.8 (m, IH), 4.6-4.7 (m, IH), 5.7-5.95 (m, 3H), 7.1-7.3 (m, IH).
13C-nmr (CDC13): δ = 14.21, 14.35, 19.8, 20.0, 22.69, 22.74, 27.8, 28.0, 32.20, 32.45, 52.18, 52.57, 52,65, 52.78, 55.31, 55.52, 55.59, 55.63, 91.6, 91.8, 92.86, 93.24, 149.02, 149.27, 162.11, 162.18, 173.02, 173.44, 174.47, 174.82.
C18H28N2O5 (MW = 352.43).
Example 61 Cellular Screen for the Detection of Inhibitors of β-Amyloid Production Numerous compounds of formula I above were assayed for their ability to inhibit /3-amyloid production in a cell line possessing the Swedish mutation. This screening assay employed cells (K293 = human kidney cell line) which were stably transfected with the gene for amyloid precursor protein 751 (APP751) containing the double mutation Lys651Met6J2 to Asn651Leu652 (APP751 numbering) in the manner described in International Patent Application
Publication No. 94/105698 and Citron et al.". This mutation is commonly called the Swedish mutation and the cells, designated as "293 751 SWE", were plated in Corning 96-well plates at 1.5-2.5 x 104 cells per well in Dulbecco's minimal essential media (Sigma, St. Louis, MO) plus 10% fetal bovine serum. Cell number is important in order to achieve /3-amyloid ELISA results within the linear range of the assay ( — 0.2 to 2.5 ng per mL).
Following overnight incubation at 37° C in an incubator equilibrated with 10% carbon dioxide, media were removed and replaced with 200 μL of a compound of formula I (drug) containing media per well for a two hour pretreatment period and cells were incubated as above. Drug stocks were prepared in 100% DMSO such that at the final drug concentration used in the treatment, the concentration of dimethyl sulfoxide did not exceed 0.5% and, in fact, usually equaled 0.1 % .
At the end of the pretreatment period, the media were again removed and replaced with fresh drug containing media as above and cells were incubated for an additional two hours. After treatment, plates were centrifuged in a Beckman GPR at 1200 rpm for five minutes at room temperature to pellet cellular debris from the conditioned media. From each well, 100 μL of conditioned media or appropriate dilutions thereof were transferred into an
ELISA plate precoated with antibody 266 [P. Seubert, Nature (1992) 359:325- 327] against amino acids 13-28 of /3-amyloid peptide as described in International Patent Application Publication No. 94/105698 and stored at 4°C overnight. An ELISA assay employing labelled antibody 6C6 [P. Seubert, Nature (1992) 359:325-327] against amino acids 1-16 of /3-amyloid peptide was run the next day to measure the amount of /3-amyloid peptide produced.
Cytotoxic effects of the compounds were measured by a modification of the method of Hansen, et al.12. To the cells remaining in the tissue culture plate was added 25 μL of a 3-(4,5-dimethylthiazol-2-yl)-2,5-diphenyltetrazolium bromide (MTT) (Sigma, St. Louis, MO) stock solution (5 mg/mL) to a final concentration of 1 mg/mL. Cells were incubated at 37°C for one hour, and cellular activity was stopped by the addition of an equal volume of MTT lysis buffer (20% w/v sodium dodecylsulfate in 50% dimethylformamide, pH 4.7). Complete extraction was achieved by overnight shaking at room temperature. The difference in the OD562nm and the OD650nm was measured in a Molecular Device's UVmax microplate reader as an indicator of the cellular viability.
The results of the /3-amyloid peptide ELISA were fit to a standard curve and expressed as ng/mL /3-amyloid peptide. In order to normalize for cytotoxicity, these results were divided by the MTT results and expressed as a percentage of the results from a drug free control. All results are the mean and standard deviation of at least six replicate assays.
The test compounds were assayed for /3-amyloid peptide production inhibition activity in cells using this assay. The results of this assay demonstrate that, each of the compounds of Examples 1-60 inhibit the β- amyloid peptide production by at least 30% as compared to control.
Example 62 In Vivo Suppression of /3-Amyloid Release and/or Synthesis
This example illustrates how the compounds of this invention could be tested for in vivo suppression of /3-amyloid release and/or synthesis. For these experiments, 3 to 4 month old PDAPP mice are used [Games et al. , (1995) Nature 373:523-527]. Depending upon which compound is being tested, the compound is usually formulated at either 5 or 10 mg/mL. Because of the low solubility factors of the compounds, they may be formulated with various vehicles, such as corn oil (Safeway, South San Francisco, CA); 10% ethanol in corn oil; 2-hydroxypropyl-/3-cyclodextrin (Research Biochemicals International, Natick MA); and carboxymethylcellulose (Sigma Chemical Co., St. Louis MO).
The mice are dosed subcutaneously with a 26 gauge needle and 3 hours later the animals are euthanized via CO2 narcosis and blood is taken by cardiac puncture using a 1 cc 25G 5/8" tuberculin syringe/needle coated with solution of 0.5 M EDTA, pH 8.0. The blood is placed in a Becton-Dickinson vacutainer tube containing EDTA and spun down for 15 minutes at 1500 x gravity at 5°C. The brains of the mice are then removed and the cortex and hippocampus are dissected out and placed on ice.
1. Brain Assay To prepare hippocampal and cortical tissue for enzyme-linked immunosorbent assays (ELISAs) each brain region is homogenized in 10 volumes of ice cold guanidine buffer (5.0 M guanidine-HCl, 50 mM Tris-HCl, pH 8.0) using a Kontes motorized pestle (Fisher, Pittsburgh PA). The homogenates are gently rocked on a rotating platform for three to four hours at room temperature and stored at -20 °C prior to quantitation of /3-amyloid.
The brain homogenates are diluted 1: 10 with ice-cold casein buffer [0.25% casein, phosphate buffered saline (PBS), 0.05% sodium azide, 20 μg/mL aprotinin, 5 mM EDTA, pH 8.0, 10 μg/mL leupeptin], thereby reducing the final concentration of guanidine to 0.5 M, before centrifugation at 16,000 x gravity for 20 minutes at 4°C. The /3-amyloid standards (1-40 or 1-42 amino acids) were prepared such that the final composition equaled 0.5 M guanidine in the presence of 0.1 % bovine serum albumin (BSA).
The total /3-amyloid sandwich ELISA, quantitating both /3-amyloid (aa 1- 40) and /3-amyloid (aa 1-42) consists of two monoclonal antibodies (mAb) to β- amyloid. The capture antibody, 266 [P. Seubert, Nature (1992) 359:325-327], is specific to amino acids 13 - 28 of 3-amyloid. The antibody 3D6 [Johnson- Wood et al., PNAS USA (1997) 94: 1550-1555], which is specific to amino acids 1 - 5 of /3-amyloid, is biotinylated and served as the reporter antibody in the assay. The 3D6 biotinylation procedure employs the manufacturer's (Pierce,
Rockford IL) protocol for NHS-biotin labeling of immunoglobulins except that 100 mM sodium bicarbonate, pH 8.5 buffer is used. The 3D6 antibody does not recognize secreted amyloid precursor protein (APP) or full-length APP but detects only /3-amyloid species with an amino terminal aspartic acid. The assay has a lower limit of sensitivity of - 50 pg/mL (11 pM) and shows no cross- reactivity to the endogenous murine /3-amyloid peptide at concentrations up to 1 ng/mL.
The configuration of the sandwich ELISA quantitating the level of β- amyloid (aa 1-42) employs the mAb 2 IF 12 [Johnson-Wood et al., PNAS USA
(1997) 94: 1550-1555] (which recognizes amino acids 33-42 of jS-amyloid) as the capture antibody. Biotinylated 3D6 is also the reporter antibody in this assay which has a lower limit of sensitivity of - 125 pg/mL (28 pM).
The 266 and 21F12 capture mAbs are coated at 10 μg/mL into 96 well immunoassay plates (Costar, Cambidge MA) overnight at room temperature.
The plates are then aspirated and blocked with 0.25 % human serum albumin in PBS buffer for at least 1 hour at room temperature, then stored desiccated at 4°C until use. The plates are rehydrated with wash buffer (Tris-buffered saline, 0.05% Tween 20) prior to use. The samples and standards are added to the plates and incubated overnight at 4°C. The plates are washed > 3 times with wash buffer between each step of the assay. The biotinylated 3D6, diluted to 0.5 μg/mL in casein incubation buffer (0.25% casein, PBS, 0.05 % Tween 20, pH 7.4) is incubated in the well for 1 hour at room temperature. Avidin- HRP (Vector, Burlingame CA) diluted 1:4000 in casein incubation buffer is added to the wells for 1 hour at room temperature. The colorimetric substrate,
Slow TMB-ELISA (Pierce, Cambridge MA), is added and allowed to react for 15 minutes, after which the enzymatic reaction is stopped with addition of 2 N H2SO4. Reaction product is quantified using a Molecular Devices Vmax (Molecular Devices, Menlo Park CA) measuring the difference in absorbance at 450 nm and 650 nm.
2. Blood Assay
The EDTA plasma is diluted 1 : 1 in specimen diluent (0.2 g/L sodium phosphate H2O (monobasic), 2.16 g/L sodium phosphate* 7H2O (dibasic), 0.5 g/L thimerosal, 8.5 g/L sodium chloride, 0.5 mL Triton X-405, 6.0 g/L globulin-free bovine serum albumin; and water). The samples and standards in specimen diluent are assayed using the total /3-amyloid assay (266 capture/3D6 reporter) described above for the brain assay except the specimen diluent was used instead of the casein diluents described. From the foregoing description, various modifications and changes in the composition and method will occur to those skilled in the art. All such modifications coming within the scope of the appended claims are intended to be included therein.
SEQUENCE LISTING
(1) GENERAL INFORMATION:
(i) APPLICANTS:ATHENA NEUROSCIENCES, INC. ELI LILLY & COMPANY JAMES E. AUDIA BEVERLY K. FOLMER VARGHESE JOHN LEE H. LATIMER JEFFREY S. NISSEN WARREN J. PORTER EUGENE D. THORSETT JING WU
(ii) TITLE OF INVENTION: N- (ARYL/HETEROARYL) AMINO
ACID ESTERS, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITONS COMPRISING SAME, AND METHODS FOR INHIBITING 3-AMYLOID PEPTIDE RELEASE AND/OR ITS SYNTHESIS BY USE OF SUCH COMPOUNDS
(iii) NUMBER OF SEQUENCES: 1
(iv) CORRESPONDENCE ADDRESS:
(A) ADDRESSEE: Burns, Doane, S ecker &
Mathis, LLP
(B) STREET: P.O. Box 1404
(C) CITY: Alexandria
(D) STATE: Virginia
(E) COUNTRY: U.S.A.
(F) ZIP: 22313-1404
(v) COMPUTER READABLE FORM:
(A) MEDIUM TYPE: Floppy disk
(B) COMPUTER: IBM PC compatible
(C) OPERATING SYSTEM: PC-DOS/MS-DOS
(D) SOFTWARE: Patentln Release #1.0, Version
#1.30
(vi) CURRENT APPLICATION DATA:
(A) APPLICATION NUMBER: Unassigned
(B) FILING DATE: Unassigned
(C) CLASSIFICATION:
(vii) PRIOR APPLICATION DATA:
(A) U.S. PATENT APPLICATION NO. 08/755,334
(B) FILING DATE: 22 November 1996 (viii) ATTORNEY/AGENT INFORMATION:
(A) NAME: Swiss, Gerald F.
(B) REGISTRATION NUMBER: 30,113
(C) REFERENCE/DOCKET NUMBER: 002010-057
(ix) TELECOMMUNICATION INFORMATION:
(A) TELEPHONE: 650-854-7400
(B) TELEFAX: 650-854-8275
(2) INFORMATION FOR SEQ ID NO:l:
(i) SEQUENCE CHARACTERISTICS:
(A) LENGTH: 43 amino acids
(B) TYPE: peptide (D) TOPOLOGY: linear
(ii) MOLECULE TYPE: peptide
(xi) SEQUENCE DESCRIPTION: SEQ ID NO 1:
Asp Ala Glu Phe Arg His Asp Ser Gly Tyr Glu Val His His 1 5 10
Gin Lys Leu Val Phe Phe Ala Glu Asp Val Gly Ser Asn Lys 15 20 25
Gly Ala lie lie Gly Leu Met Val Gly Gly Val Val lie Ala 30 35 40
Thr

Claims

WHAT IS CLAIMED IS:
1. A method for inhibiting /3-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis in a cell which method comprises administering to such a cell an amount of a compound or a mixture of compounds effective in inhibiting the cellular release and/or synthesis of /3-amyloid peptide wherein said compounds are represented by formula I:
Figure imgf000100_0001
wherein: R' is selected from the group consisting of
(a) phenyl,
(b) a substituted phenyl group of formula II:
Figure imgf000100_0002
wherein Rc is selected from the group consisting of acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, azido, cyano, halo, hydrogen, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, and wherein Rb and Rc are fused to form a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring with the phenyl ring,
Rb and Rb' are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, alkoxy, and thioalkoxy with the proviso that when Rc is hydrogen, then Rb and Rb' are either both hydrogen or both substituents other than hydrogen,
(c) 2-naphthyl,
(d) 2-naphthyl substituted at the 4, 5, 6, 7 and/or 8 positions with 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, aryl, and heteroaryl,
(e) heteroaryl, and
(f) substituted heteroaryl containing 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, thioalkoxy and thioaryloxy provided that said substituents are not ortho to the heteroaryl attachment to the -NH group;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl of from 1 to
4 carbon atoms, alkylalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylthioalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl and substituted heteroaryl provided that the substituents are not ortho to the attachment of the aryl or heteroaryl atom to the carbon atom;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, and heterocyclic; X is -C(O)Y where Y is selected from the group consisting of
(a) alkyl,
(b) substituted alkyl with the proviso that the substitution on said substituted alkyl does not include α-haloalkyl, α-diazoalkyl or α-OC(O)alkyl groups, (c) alkoxy or thioalkoxy,
(d) substituted alkoxy or substituted thioalkoxy,
(e) hydroxy, (f) aryl,
(g) heteroaryl, (h) heterocyclic, (i) -NR'R" where R' and R" are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and where R' and R" are joined to form a cyclic group having from 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally containing 1 to 2 additional heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen and optionally substituted with one or more alkyl or alkoxy groups, and when R3 contains at least 3 carbon atoms, X can also be -CR4R4Y' where each R4 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic and Y' is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, thiol, -OC(O)R5, -SSR5, -SSC(O)R5 where
R5 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic, and with the proviso that when R' is 3,4-dichlorophenyl, R2 is methyl, and R3 is benzyl derived from D-phenylalanine, then X is not -C(O)OCH3.
2. A method for preventing the onset of AD in a patient at risk for developing AD which method comprises administering to said patient a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically inert carrier and an effective amount of a compound or a mixture of compounds of formula I:
Figure imgf000102_0001
wherein:
R' is selected from the group consisting of
(a) phenyl,
(b) a substituted phenyl group of formula II:
Figure imgf000103_0001
wherein Rc is selected from the group consisting of acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, azido, cyano, halo, hydrogen, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, and wherein Rb and Rc are fused to form a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring with the phenyl ring,
Rb and Rb' are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, alkoxy, and thioalkoxy with the proviso that when Rc is hydrogen, then Rb and Rb' are either both hydrogen or both substituents other than hydrogen,
(c) 2-naphthyl,
(d) 2-naphthyl substituted at the 4, 5, 6, 7 and/or 8 positions with 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, aryl, and heteroaryl,
(e) heteroaryl, and
(f) substituted heteroaryl containing 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, thioalkoxy and thioaryloxy provided that said substituents are not ortho to the heteroaryl attachment to the -NH group;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylthioalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl and substituted heteroaryl provided that the substituents are not ortho to the attachment of the aryl or heteroaryl atom to the carbon atom; R3 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, and heterocyclic;
X is -C(O)Y where Y is selected from the group consisting of (a) alkyl,
(b) substituted alkyl with the proviso that the substitution on said substituted alkyl does not include α-haloalkyl, α-diazoalkyl or α-OC(O)alkyl groups,
(c) alkoxy or thioalkoxy, (d) substituted alkoxy or substituted thioalkoxy,
(e) hydroxy,
(f) aryl,
(g) heteroaryl, (h) heterocyclic, (i) -NR'R" where R' and R" are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and where R' and R" are joined to form a cyclic group having from 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally containing 1 to 2 additional heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen and optionally substituted with one or more alkyl or alkoxy groups, and when R3 contains at least 3 carbon atoms, X can also be -CR4R4Y' where each R4 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic and Y' is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, thiol, -OC(O)R5, -SSR5, -SSC(O)R5 where R5 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic, and with the proviso that when R1 is 3,4-dichlorophenyl, R2 is methyl, and R3 is benzyl derived from D-phenylalanine, then X is not -C(O)OCH3.
3. A method for treating a patient with AD in order to inhibit further deterioration in the condition of that patient which method comprises administering to said patient a pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically inert carrier and an effective amount of a compound or a mixture of compounds of formula I:
Figure imgf000105_0001
wherein:
R1 is selected from the group consisting of
(a) phenyl,
(b) a substituted phenyl group of formula II:
Figure imgf000105_0002
wherein Rc is selected from the group consisting of acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, azido, cyano, halo, hydrogen, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, and wherein Rb and Rc are fused to form a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring with the phenyl ring, Rb and Rb' are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, alkoxy, and thioalkoxy with the proviso that when Rc is hydrogen, then Rb and Rb' are either both hydrogen or both substituents other than hydrogen, (c) 2-naphthyl, (d) 2-naphthyl substituted at the 4, 5, 6, 7 and/or 8 positions with 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, aryl, and heteroaryl,
(e) heteroaryl, and (f) substituted heteroaryl containing 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, thioalkoxy and thioaryloxy provided that said substituents are not ortho to the heteroaryl attachment to the -NH group;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylthioalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl and substituted heteroaryl provided that the substituents are not ortho to the attachment of the aryl or heteroaryl atom to the carbon atom;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, and heterocyclic;
X is -C(O)Y where Y is selected from the group consisting of
(a) alkyl,
(b) substituted alkyl with the proviso that the substitution on said substituted alkyl does not include α-haloalkyl, α-diazoalkyl or α-OC(O)alkyl groups,
(c) alkoxy or thioalkoxy,
(d) substituted alkoxy or substituted thioalkoxy,
(e) hydroxy, (f) aryl,
(g) heteroaryl,
(h) heterocyclic,
(i) -NR'R" where R' and R" are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and where R' and R" are joined to form a cyclic group having from 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally containing 1 to 2 additional heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen and optionally substituted with one or more alkyl or alkoxy groups, and when R3 contains at least 3 carbon atoms, X can also be -CR4R4Y' where each R4 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic and Y' is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, thiol, -OC(O)R5, -SSR5, -SSC(O)R5 where R5 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic, and with the proviso that when R' is 3,4-dichlorophenyl, R2 is methyl, and R3 is benzyl derived from D-phenylalanine, then X is not -C(O)OCH3.
4. The method according to Claim 1, 2 or 3 wherein R' is phenyl, 2-naphthyl, quinolin-3-yl, benzothiazol-6-yl, and 5-indolyl.
5. The method according to Claim 1, 2 or 3 wherein R' is a substituted phenyl group of the formula:
Figure imgf000107_0001
wherein Rc is selected from the group consisting of acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, azido, cyano, halo, hydrogen, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, and wherein Rb and Rc are fused to form a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring with the phenyl ring,
Rb and Rb' are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, alkoxy, and thioalkoxy with the proviso that when Rc is hydrogen, then Rb and Rb' are either both hydrogen or both substituents other than hydrogen.
6. The method according to Claim 1 , 2 or 3 wherein R1 is a substituted 2-naphthyl substituted at the 4, 5, 6, 7 and/or 8 positions with 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, aryl, and heteroaryl.
7. The method according to Claim 1, 2 or 3 wherein R1 is a substituted heteroaryl containing 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy provided that said substituents are not ortho to the heteroaryl attachment to the -NH group.
8. The method according to Claim 7 wherein R1 is a 4-substituted, a 3,5-disubstituted or 3,4-disubstituted phenyl.
9. The method according to Claim 8 wherein R1 is a 3,5-disubstituted phenyl.
10. The method according to Claim 9 wherein the 3,5-disubstituted phenyl is selected from the group consisting of 3,5-dichlorophenyl, 3,5- difluorophenyl, 3,5-di(trifluoromethyl)phenyl and 3,5-dimethoxyphenyl.
11. The method according to Claim 8 wherein R' is a 3,4-disubstituted phenyl.
12. The method according to Claim 11 wherein the 3,4-disubstituted phenyl is selected from the group consisting of 3,4-dichlorophenyl, 3,4- difluorophenyl, 3-(trifluoromethyl)-4-chlorophenyl, 3-chloro-4-cyanophenyl, 3-chloro-4-iodophenyl and 3,4-methylenedioxyphenyl.
13. The method according to Claim 8 wherein R' is a 4-substituted phenyl.
14. The method according to Claim 13 wherein the 4-substituted phenyl is selected from the group consisting of 4-azidophenyl, 4-bromophenyl, 4- chlorophenyl, 4-cyanophenyl, 4-ethylphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4-iodophenyl, 4- (phenylcarbonyl)phenyl, and 4-(l-ethoxy)ethylphenyl.
15. The method of Claims 1, 2 or 3 wherein R' is 2-methylquinolin-6- yi-
16. The method according to Claims 1, 2 or 3 wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylthioalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms and aryl.
17. The method according to Claim 16 wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, wø-propyl, «-butyl, iso-butyl,
-CH2CH2SCH3 and phenyl.
18. The method according to Claims 1, 2 or 3 wherein R3 is an alkyl group.
19. The method according to Claim 18 wherein the alkyl group is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, wø-propyl, rt-butyl, iso-butyl and ec-butyl.
20. The method according to Claims 1 , 2 or 3 wherein R3 is a substituted alkyl group.
21. The method according to Claim 20 wherein the substituted alkyl group is selected from the group consisting of α-hydroxyethyl, -CH2-cyclohexyl, benzyl, -hydroxybenzyl, 3-iodo-4-hydroxybenzyl, 3,5-diiodo- 4-hydroxybenzyl, -CH2-indol-3-yl,
Figure imgf000110_0001
-CH2-(1-N- benzyl-imidazol-4-yl), -CH2-imidazol-4-yl, -CH2CH2SCH3, -(CH2)4NHC(O)(CH2)3CH3, and -(CH2)yC(O)OR5 where y is 1 or 2 and R5 is hydrogen, methyl, or tert-butyl.
22. The method according to Claims 1, 2 or 3 wherein X is -C(O)Y wherein Y is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy and thioalkoxy.
23. The method according to Claim 22 wherein Y is alkoxy selected from the group consisting of methoxy, ethoxy, n-propoxy, wø-propoxy, /ι-butoxy, iso-butoxy, and tert-butoxy.
24. The method according to Claims 1, 2, or 3 wherein X is -C(O)Y and Y is -NR'R" where R' and R" are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and where R' and R" are joined to form a cyclic group having from 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally containing 1 to 2 additional heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen and optionally substituted with one or more alkyl or alkoxy groups.
25. The method according to Claim 24 wherein Y is selected from the group consisting of amino (-NH2), N-(/ ø-butyl)amino, N-methylamino, N,N- dimethylamino, and N-benzylamino.
26. The method according to Claims 1, 2 or 3 wherein X is -CH2OH.
27. The method according to Claims 1, 2 or 3 wherein the compound of formula I is selected from the group consisting of: N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl] valine methyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl] valine N-wø-butyl amide N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]threonine methyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]valine ethyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]valine tert-butyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]valine amide
N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanine N-(l-hydroxy-3-methyl-2-butyl) amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]valine N,N-dimethyl amide N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]valine N-methyl amide N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]alanine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]leucine methyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]phenylalanine methyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]isoleucine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminopentanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]tryptophan methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]aspartic acid α-methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]aspartic acid /3-(tert-butyl ester) α-methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-N-BOC-lysine methyl ester N-[N-benzothiazol-6-yl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]lysine methyl ester N-[N- 4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]tyrosine methyl ester
N-[N- 5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]alanine methyl ester
N-lN-i 5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminopentanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N- 5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]phenylalanine methyl ester N-[N- 4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]aspartic acid /3-(methyl ester) α-methyl ester
N-[N- 4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-l-benzylhistidine methyl ester
N-[N- 4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]glutamic acid γ-(t^rt-butyl ester) α-methyl ester
N-[N- 4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]leucine amide N-[N- 4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]glutamic acid α-methyl ester
N-[N- 4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-(3,5-diiodo)tyrosine methyl ester N-[N- 4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-(3-iodo)tyrosine methyl ester N-[N- 5-dichlorophenyl)glycyl]-2-aminopentanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N- 4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-Ne-(hexanoyl)lysine methyl ester
N-[N- 4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]phenylalanine amide N-[N- 4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexan-(N-methyl)-amide N-[N- 4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-/3-cyclohexylalanine methyl ester N-[N- 4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanamide
N-[N- 4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexan-(NN-dimethyl)- amide
N-[N- 4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]methionine methyl ester
N-[N- 5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexan-(NN-dimethyl)- amide N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanamide
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexan-(N-methyl)- amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]histidine methyl ester
N-[N-(quinolin-3-yl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester N-[N-(benzothiazol-2-yl)-L-alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-difluorophenyl)alanyl]alanine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-difluorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-L-alanyl]-S-2-aminohexanamide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexan-(N-benzyl)-amide N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-2-amino-2-phenylethanol
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)phenylglycinyl]alanine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanol
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-amino-2-phenylethanol
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-L-alanyl]-L-phenylglycine tert-butyl ester N-[N-(3,5-di-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-L-alanyl]-L-phenylglycine tert- butyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)-L-alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
28. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a pharmaceutically inert carrier and a pharmaceutically effective amount of a compound of formula I:
Figure imgf000114_0001
R1 is selected from the group consisting of
(a) phenyl,
(b) a substituted phenyl group of formula II:
Figure imgf000114_0002
wherein Rc is selected from the group consisting of acyl. alkyl, alkoxy. alkylalkoxy, azido, cyano, halo, hydrogen, nitro, trihalomethyl. thioalkoxy, and wherein Rb and Rc are fused to form a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring with the phenyl ring,
Rb and Rb are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, alkoxy, and thioalkoxy with the proviso that when Rc is hydrogen, then Rb and Rb' are either both hydrogen or both substituents other than hydrogen,
(c) 2-naphthyl,
(d) 2-naphthyl substituted at the 4, 5, 6, 7 and/or 8 positions with 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, aryl, and heteroaryl. (e) heteroaryl, and
(f) substituted heteroaryl containing 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, thioalkoxy and thioaryloxy provided that said substituents are not ortho to the heteroaryl attachment to the -NH group;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylthioalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl and substituted heteroaryl provided that the substituents are not ortho to the attachment of the aryl or heteroaryl atom to the carbon atom;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, and heterocyclic;
X is -C(O)Y where Y is selected from the group consisting of (a) alkyl,
(b) substituted alkyl with the proviso that the substitution on said substituted alkyl does not include α-haloalkyl, α-diazoalkyl or α-OC(O)alkyl groups,
(c) alkoxy or thioalkoxy, (d) substituted alkoxy or substituted thioalkoxy,
(e) hydroxy,
(f) aryl,
(g) heteroaryl, (h) heterocyclic, (i) -NR'R" where R' and R" are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and where R' and R" are joined to form a cyclic group having from 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally containing 1 to 2 additional heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen and optionally substituted with one or more alkyl or alkoxy groups, and when R3 contains at least 3 carbon atoms, X can also be -CR*R Y' where each R4 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic and Y' is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, thiol, -OC(O)R5, -SSR5, -SSC(O)R5 where R5 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic, and with the proviso that when R1 is 3,4-dichlorophenyl, R2 is methyl, and R3 is benzyl derived from D-phenylalanine, then X is not -C(O)OCH3.
29. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 26 wherein R1 is phenyl, 2-naphthyl, quinolin-3-yl, benzothiazol-6-yl, and 5-indolyl.
30. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 26 wherein R1 is a substituted phenyl group of the formula:
Figure imgf000116_0001
Rtf wherein Rc is selected from the group consisting of acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, azido, cyano, halo, hydrogen, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, and wherein Rb and Rc are fused to form a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring with the phenyl ring,
Rb and Rb are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, alkoxy, and thioalkoxy with the proviso that when Rc is hydrogen, then R° and Rb' are either both hydrogen or both substituents other than hydrogen.
31. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 26 wherein R1 is a substituted 2-naphthyl substituted at the 4, 5, 6, 7 and/or 8 positions with 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, aryl, and heteroaryl.
32. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 26 wherein R1 is a substituted heteroaryl containing 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy provided that said substituents are not ortho to the heteroaryl attachment to the -NH group.
33. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 30 wherein R1 is a
4-substituted, a 3,5-disubstituted or 3,4-disubstituted phenyl.
34. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 31 wherein R1 is a 3,5-disubstituted phenyl.
35. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 32 wherein the 3,5-disubstituted phenyl is selected from the group consisting of 3,5- dichlorophenyl, 3, 5 -difluorophenyl, 3,5-di(trifluoromethyl)phenyl and 3,5- dimethoxypheny 1.
36. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 31 wherein R1 is a 3,4-disubstituted phenyl.
37. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 34 wherein the 3,4-disubstituted phenyl is selected from the group consisting of 3,4- dichlorophenyl, 3,4-difluorophenyl, 3-(trifluoromethyl)-4-chlorophenyl, 3-chloro- 4-cyanophenyl, 3-chloro-4-iodophenyl and 3,4-methylenedioxyphenyl.
38. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 31 wherein R1 is a 4-substituted phenyl.
39. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 36 wherein the 4- substituted phenyl is selected from the group consisting of 4-azidophenyl, 4-bromophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 4-cyanophenyl, 4-ethylphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4- iodophenyl, 4-(phenylcarbonyl)phenyl, and 4-(l-ethoxy)ethylphenyl.
40. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 26 wherein R1 is 2-methylquinolin-6-yl .
41. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 26 wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylthioalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms and aryl.
42. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 39 wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, wø-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, -CH2CH2SCH3 and phenyl.
43. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 26 wherein R3 is an alkyl group.
44. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 41 wherein the alkyl group is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, isopropyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl and sec-butyl.
45. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 26 wherein R3 is a substituted alkyl group.
46. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 43 wherein the substituted alkyl group is selected from the group consisting of α -hydroxy ethyl, -CH2-cyclohexyl, benzyl, /?-hydroxybenzyl, 3-iodo-4-hydroxybenzyl, 3,5-diiodo-4- hydroxybenzyl, -CH2-indol-3-yl, -(CH2)4-NH-BOC, -(CH2)4-NH2, -CH2-(1-N- benzyl-imidazol-4-yl), -CH2-imidazol-4-yl, -CH2CH2SCH3, -(CH2)4NHC(O)(CH2)3CH3, and -(CH2)yC(O)OR5 where y is 1 or 2 and R5 is hydrogen, methyl, or tert-butyl.
47. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 26 wherein X is - C(O)Y wherein Y is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy and thioalkoxy.
48. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 45 wherein Y is alkoxy selected from the group consisting of methoxy, ethyoxy, n -propoxy, iso- propoxy, n-butoxy, wø-butoxy, and tert-butoxy.
49. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 26 wherein X is - C(O)Y and Y is -NR'R" where R' and R" are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and where R' and R" are joined to form a cyclic group having from 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally containing 1 to 2 additional heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen and optionally substituted with one or more alkyl or alkoxy groups.
50. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 47 wherein Y is selected from the group consisting of amino (-NH2), N-( 5O-butyl)amino, N- methy lamino, N,N-dimethy lamino, and N-benzy lamino.
51. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 26 wherein X is - CH2OH.
52. The pharmaceutical composition according to Claim 26 wherein the compound of formula I is selected from the group consisting of: N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl] valine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl] valine N-wø-butyl amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]threonine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl] valine ethyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]valine tert-butyl ester
N-[N-(3 ,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]valine amide
N-(3 ,4-dichlorophenyl)alanine N-(l-hydroxy-3-methyl-2-butyl) amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]valine N,N-dimethyl amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl] valine N-methyl amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl] alanine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]leucine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]phenylalanine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]isoleucine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminopentanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]tryptophan methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]aspartic acid α-methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl] aspartic acid β-(tert-butyl ester) α-methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-N-BOC-lysine methyl ester
N-[N-benzothiazol-6-yl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]lysine methyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]tyrosine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]alanine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminopentanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]phenylalanine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]aspartic acid β-(methyl ester) α-methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-l-benzylhistidine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]glutamic acid γ-(tert-butyl ester) α-methyl ester
N-[N-(3 ,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]leucine amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]glutamic acid α-methyl ester
N-[N-(3 ,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-(3 ,5-diiodo)tyrosine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-(3-iodo)tyrosine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)glycyl]-2-aminopentanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(3 ,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-Ne-(hexanoyl)lysine methyl ester
N-[N-(3 ,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]phenylalanine amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexan-(N-methyl)-amide
N-[N-(3 ,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-β-cyclohexylalanine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanamide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexan-(NN-dimethyl)- amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]methionine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexan-(NN-dimethyl)- amide N- [N-(3 , 5 -dichloropheny l)alany 1] -2-aminohexanamide
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexan-(N-methyl)- amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]histidine methyl ester
N-[N-(quinolin-3-yl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(benzothiazol-2-yl)-L-alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-difluorophenyl)alanyl]alanine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-difluorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-L-alanyl]-S-2-aminohexanamide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexan-(N-benzyl)-amide
N- [N-(3 ,4-dichlorophenyl)-D , L-alanyl] -2-amino-2-pheny lethanol
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)phenylglycinyl]alanine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanol
N- [N-(3 , 5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl] -2-amino-2-pheny lethanol
N-[N-(3 ,5 -dichloropheny l)-L-alanyl]-L-phenylgly cine tert-butyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-di-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-L-alanyl]-L-phenylglycine tert- butyl ester
N-[N-(3 ,5-dimethoxyphenyl)-L-alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
53. A compound of formula III:
R3
0 m
1 | H
wherein:
R1 is selected from the group consisting of (a) phenyl,
(b) a substituted phenyl group of formula II:
Figure imgf000123_0001
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of acyl, alkyl. alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, azido, cyano, halo, hydrogen, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, and wherein Rb and Rc are fused to form a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring with the phenyl ring,
Rb and Rb are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, alkoxy, and thioalkoxy with the proviso that when Rc is hydrogen, then Rb and Rb' are either both hydrogen or both substituents other than hydrogen,
(c) 2-naphthyl,
(d) 2-naphthyl substituted at the 4, 5, 6, 7 and/or 8 positions with 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, aryl, and heteroaryl, (e) heteroaryl, and
(f) substituted heteroaryl containing 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, thioalkoxy and thioaryloxy provided that said substituents are not ortho to the heteroaryl attachment to the -NH group;
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylthioalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, aryl, heteroaryl, substituted aryl and substituted heteroaryl provided that the substituents are not ortho to the attachment of the aryl or heteroaryl atom to the carbon atom;
R3 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heteroaryl, substituted alkyl, substituted alkenyl, substituted alkynyl, and heterocyclic;
X is -C(O)Y where Y is selected from the group consisting of
(a) alkyl,
(b) substituted alkyl with the proviso that the substitution on said substituted alkyl does not include α-haloalkyl, α-diazoalkyl or α-OC(O)alkyl groups, (c) alkoxy or thioalkoxy,
(d) substituted alkoxy or substituted thioalkoxy,
(e) hydroxy,
(f) aryl,
(g) heteroaryl, (h) heterocyclic,
(i) -NR'R" where R' and R" are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and where R' and R" are joined to form a cyclic group having from 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally containing 1 to 2 additional heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen and optionally substituted with one or more alkyl or alkoxy groups, and when R3 contains at least 3 carbon atoms, X can also be -CR4R4Y' where each R4 is independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic and Y' is selected from the group consisting of hydroxyl, amino, thiol, -OC(O)R5, -SSR5, -SSC(O)R5 where R5 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl. substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl and heterocyclic, and with the proviso that when R1 is 3,4-dichlorophenyl, R2 is methyl, and R3 is benzyl derived from D-phenylglycine, then X is not -C(O)OCH3, and still with the further proviso excluding the following known compounds: when R1 is phenyl, R2 is methyl, X is -C(O)NHφ, then R3 is not methyl, wσ-propyl, wø-butyl; and when R1 is phenyl, R2 is methyl, X is -C(O)NH2, then R3 is not benzyl.
54. The compound according to Claim 51 wherein R1 is phenyl, 2- naphthyl, quinolin-3-yl, benzothiazol-6-yl, and 5-indolyl.
55. The compound according to Claim 51 wherein R1 is a substituted phenyl group of the formula:
Figure imgf000125_0001
R wherein Rc is selected from the group consisting of acyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkylalkoxy, azido, cyano, halo, hydrogen, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, and wherein Rb and Rc are fused to form a heteroaryl or heterocyclic ring with the phenyl ring, Rb and Rb are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, halo, nitro, cyano, trihalomethyl, alkoxy, and thioalkoxy with the proviso that when Rc is hydrogen, then Rb and Rb' are either both hydrogen or both substituents other than hydrogen.
56. The compound according to Claim 51 wherein R1 is a substituted 2- naphthyl substimted at the 4, 5, 6, 7 and/or 8 positions with 1 to 5 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, halo, cyano, nitro, trihalomethyl, thioalkoxy, aryl, and heteroaryl.
57. The compound according to Claim 51 wherein R1 is a substituted heteroaryl containing 1 to 3 substituents selected from the group consisting of alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, cyano, halo, nitro, heteroaryl, thioalkoxy, thioaryloxy provided that said substituents are not ortho to the heteroaryl attachment to the - NH group.
58. The compound according to Claim 55 wherein R1 is a 4-substituted, a
3,5-disubstituted or 3,4-disubstituted phenyl.
59. The compound according to Claim 56 wherein R1 is a 3,5-disubstituted phenyl.
60. The compound according to Claim 57 wherein the 3,5-disubstituted phenyl is selected from the group consisting of 3,5-dichlorophenyl, 3,5- difluorophenyl, 3,5-di(trifluoromethyl)phenyl and 3,5-dimethoxyphenyl.
61. The compound according to Claim 56 wherein R1 is a 3,4-disubstituted phenyl.
62. The compound according to Claim 59 wherein the 3,4-disubstituted phenyl is selected from the group consisting of 3,4-dichlorophenyl, 3,4- difluorophenyl, 3-(trifluoromethyl)-4-chlorophenyl, 3-chloro-4-cyanophenyl, 3- chloro-4-iodophenyl and 3,4-methylenedioxyphenyl.
63. The compound according to Claim 56 wherein R1 is a 4-substituted phenyl.
64. The compound according to Claim 61 wherein the 4-substituted phenyl is selected from the group consisting of 4-azidophenyl,
4-bromophenyl, 4-chlorophenyl, 4-cyanophenyl, 4-ethylphenyl, 4-fluorophenyl, 4- iodophenyl, 4-(phenylcarbonyl)phenyl, and 4-(l-ethoxy)ethylphenyl.
65. The compound according to Claim 51 wherein R1 is 2-methylquinolin- 6-yl.
66. The compound according to Claim 51 wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkylthioalkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms and aryl.
67. The compound according to Claim 64 wherein R2 is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl, - CH2CH2SCH3 and phenyl.
68. The compound according to Claim 51 wherein R3 is an alkyl group.
69. The compound according to Claim 66 wherein the alkyl group is selected from the group consisting of methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, iso-propyl, n-butyl, iso-butyl and sec-butyl.
70. The compound according to Claim 51 wherein R3 is a substituted alkyl group.
71. The compound according to Claim 68 wherein the substituted alkyl group is selected from the group consisting of α -hydroxy ethyl, -CH2-cyclohexyl, benzyl, /?-hydroxybenzyl, 3-iodo-4-hydroxybenzyl, 3,5-diiodo-4- hydroxybenzyl, -CH2-indol-3-yl, -(CH2)4-NH-BOC, -(CH2)4-NH2, -CH2-(1-N- benzyl-imidazol-4-yl), -CH2-imidazol-4-yl, -CH2CH2SCH3, -(CH2)4NHC(O)(CH2)3CH3, and -(CH2)yC(O)OR5 where y is 1 or 2 and R5 is hydrogen, methyl, or tert-butyl.
72. The compound according to Claim 51 wherein X is -C(O)Y wherein Y is selected from the group consisting of alkoxy and thioalkoxy.
73. The compound according to Claim 70 wherein Y is alkoxy selected from the group consisting of methoxy, ethyoxy, n-propoxy, wø-propoxy, n-butoxy, wø-butoxy, and tcrt-butoxy.
74. The compound according to Claim 51 wherein X is -C(O)Y and Y is - NR'R" where R' and R" are independently selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, heterocyclic, and where R' and R" are joined to form a cyclic group having from 2 to 8 carbon atoms optionally containing 1 to 2 additional heteroatoms selected from the group consisting of oxygen, sulfur and nitrogen and optionally substituted with one or more alkyl or alkoxy groups.
75. The compound according to Claim 72 wherein Y is selected from the group consisting of amino (-NH2), N-(wø-butyl)amino, N-methy lamino, N,N- dimethy lamino, and N-benzy lamino.
76. The compound according to Claim 51 wherein X is -CH,OH.
77. The compound according to Claim 51 wherein the compound of formula I is selected from the group consisting of:
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl] valine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl] valine N-wø-butyl amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]threonine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl] valine ethyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]valine tert-butyl ester
N-[N-(3 ,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]valine amide N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanine N-(l-hydroxy-3-methyl-2-butyl) amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl] valine N,N-dimethyl amide N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]valine N-methyl amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]alanine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]leucine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]phenylalanine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]isoleucine methyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminopentanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]tryptophan methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]aspartic acid α-methyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]aspartic acid ^-(tert-butyl ester) α-methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-N-BOC-lysine methyl ester N-[N-benzothiazol-6-yl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]lysine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]tyrosine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]alanine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminopentanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]phenylalanine methyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]aspartic acid /3-(methyl ester) α-methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-l-benzylhistidine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]glutamic acid y-(tert-butyl ester) α-methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]leucine amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]glutamic acid α-methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-(3,5-diiodo)tyrosine methyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-(3-iodo)tyrosine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)glycyl]-2-aminopentanoic acid methyl ester N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-Ne-(hexanoyl)lysine methyl ester
N-[N-(3 ,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]phenylalanine amide N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexan-(N-methyl)-amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-/3-cyclohexylalanine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanamide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexan-(N,N-dimethyl)- amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl] methionine methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexan-(NN-dimethyl)- amide
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanamide
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexan-(N-methyl)- amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]histidine methyl ester
N-[N-(quinolin-3-yl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester N-[N-(benzothiazol-2-yl)-L-alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-difluorophenyl)alanyl]alanine methyl ester N-[N-(3,5-difluorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-L-alanyl]-S-2-aminohexanamide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexan-(N-benzyl)-amide
N-[N-(3,4-dichlorophenyl)-D,L-alanyl]-2-amino-2-phenylethanol
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)phenylglycinyl]alanine methyl ester N-[N-(3 ,4-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-aminohexanol
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)alanyl]-2-amino-2-phenylethanol
N-[N-(3,5-dichlorophenyl)-L-alanyl]-L-phenylglycine tert-butyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-di-(trifluoromethyl)phenyl)-L-alanyl]-L-phenylglycine tert- butyl ester
N-[N-(3,5-dimethoxyphenyl)-L-alanyl]-2-aminohexanoic acid methyl ester and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
PCT/US1997/018704 1996-11-22 1997-11-20 N-(ARYL/HETEROARYL) AMINO ACID DERIVATIVES, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING SAME, AND METHODS FOR INHIBITING β-AMYLOID PEPTIDE RELEASE AND/OR ITS SYNTHESIS BY USE OF SUCH COMPOUNDS WO1998022493A2 (en)

Priority Applications (9)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
AU53543/98A AU5354398A (en) 1996-11-22 1997-11-20 N-(aryl/heteroaryl) amino acid derivatives, pharmaceutical compositions compri sing same, and methods for inhibiting beta-amyloid peptide release and/or it s synthesis by use of such compounds
CA002270876A CA2270876A1 (en) 1996-11-22 1997-11-20 N-(aryl/heteroaryl) amino acid derivatives, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting .beta.-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
JP52364998A JP2001519769A (en) 1996-11-22 1997-11-20 N- (aryl / heteroaryl) amino acid derivatives, pharmaceutical compositions thereof and methods of inhibiting the release of β-amyloid peptide and / or the synthesis thereof using the compounds
BR9714358A BR9714358A (en) 1996-11-22 1997-11-20 Derivatives of n- (aryl / heteroaryl) amino acid, pharmaceutical compositions comprising them, and methods for inhibiting the release of beta-amyloid peptide and / or its synthesis by using such compounds
HU0001383A HUP0001383A3 (en) 1996-11-22 1997-11-20 N-(aryl/heteroaryl) amino acid derivatives, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same and their use
IL12947797A IL129477A0 (en) 1996-11-22 1997-11-20 N-(aryl/heteroaryl)amino acid derivatives pharmaceutical compositions comprising same and methods for inhibiting beta-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
NZ335157A NZ335157A (en) 1996-11-22 1997-11-20 N-(aryl/heteroaryl) amino acid derivatives and methods for inhibiting beta-amyloid peptide release or its synthesis
EP97950576A EP0942923A2 (en) 1996-11-22 1997-11-20 N-(ARYL/HETEROARYL) AMINO ACID DERIVATIVES, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING SAME, AND METHODS FOR INHIBITING $g(b)-AMYLOID PEPTIDE RELEASE AND/OR ITS SYNTHESIS BY USE OF SUCH COMPOUNDS
NO992426A NO992426L (en) 1996-11-22 1999-05-20 N- (aryl / heteroaryl) amino acid derivatives, pharmaceutical compositions comprising the same, and methods for inhibiting <beta> -amyloid peptide release and / or its synthesis using such compounds

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US75533496A 1996-11-22 1996-11-22
US08/755,334 1996-11-22

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO1998022493A2 true WO1998022493A2 (en) 1998-05-28
WO1998022493A3 WO1998022493A3 (en) 1998-07-23

Family

ID=25038718

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/US1997/018704 WO1998022493A2 (en) 1996-11-22 1997-11-20 N-(ARYL/HETEROARYL) AMINO ACID DERIVATIVES, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING SAME, AND METHODS FOR INHIBITING β-AMYLOID PEPTIDE RELEASE AND/OR ITS SYNTHESIS BY USE OF SUCH COMPOUNDS

Country Status (13)

Country Link
EP (1) EP0942923A2 (en)
JP (1) JP2001519769A (en)
CN (1) CN1237978A (en)
AU (1) AU5354398A (en)
BR (1) BR9714358A (en)
CA (1) CA2270876A1 (en)
HU (1) HUP0001383A3 (en)
ID (1) ID22275A (en)
IL (1) IL129477A0 (en)
NO (1) NO992426L (en)
NZ (1) NZ335157A (en)
TR (1) TR199901132T2 (en)
WO (1) WO1998022493A2 (en)

Cited By (29)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US6432944B1 (en) 2000-07-06 2002-08-13 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Benzodiazepinone β-amyloid inhibitors: arylacetamidoalanyl derivatives
US6486350B1 (en) 1998-09-30 2002-11-26 Elan Pharmaceuticals Inc. Biological reagents and methods for determining the mechanism in the generation of β-amyloid peptide
US6503901B1 (en) 1999-10-08 2003-01-07 Bristol Myers Squibb Pharma Company Amino lactam sulfonamides as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US6503902B2 (en) 1999-09-13 2003-01-07 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Hydroxyalkanoylaminolactams and related structures as inhibitors of a β protein production
US6509333B2 (en) 2000-06-01 2003-01-21 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Lactams substituted by cyclic succinates as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US6525044B2 (en) 2000-02-17 2003-02-25 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Succinoylamino carbocycles and heterocycles as inhibitors of a-β protein production
US6610734B2 (en) 2000-12-13 2003-08-26 Wyeth Heterocyclic sulfonamide inhibitors of beta amyloid production
US6657070B2 (en) 2000-12-13 2003-12-02 Wyeth Production of chirally pure α-amino acids and N-sulfonyl α-amino acids
US6713476B2 (en) 2000-04-03 2004-03-30 Dupont Pharmaceuticals Company Substituted cycloalkyls as inhibitors of a beta protein production
US6759404B2 (en) 2000-04-03 2004-07-06 Richard E. Olson Cyclic malonamides as inhibitors of aβ protein production
WO2004071381A2 (en) * 2003-02-13 2004-08-26 Grünenthal GmbH Drugs containing substituted 2-aryl-aminoacetic acid compounds and/or substituted 2-heteroaryl-aminoacetic acid compounds
US6794381B1 (en) 1998-08-07 2004-09-21 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Succinoylamino lactams as inhibitors of aβ protein
US6878363B2 (en) 2000-05-17 2005-04-12 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Use of small molecule radioligands to discover inhibitors of amyloid-beta peptide production and for diagnostic imaging
US6900199B2 (en) 2000-04-11 2005-05-31 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Substituted lactams as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
WO2005085185A1 (en) * 2004-03-03 2005-09-15 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Aniline derivatives as selective androgen receptor modulators
US6960576B2 (en) 1999-09-13 2005-11-01 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Hydroxyalkanoylaminolactams and related structures as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US7053084B1 (en) 1998-12-24 2006-05-30 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Succinoylamino benzodiazepines as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US7153491B2 (en) 1998-11-12 2006-12-26 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Use of small molecule radioligands to discover inhibitors of amyloid-beta peptide production and for diagnostic imaging
US7300951B2 (en) 2003-03-31 2007-11-27 Wyeth Fluoro- and trifluoroalkyl-containing heterocyclic sulfonamide inhibitors of beta amyloid production and derivatives thereof
DE10259834B4 (en) * 2001-12-20 2007-11-29 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Test and screening method for the identification of inhibitors of beta-secretases
US7304056B2 (en) 1998-08-07 2007-12-04 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Succinoylamino lactams as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
EP1871379A2 (en) * 2005-04-15 2008-01-02 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Cyanoarylamines
US7399778B2 (en) 2004-01-16 2008-07-15 Wyeth Heterocyclic sulfonamide inhibitors of beta amyloid production containing an azole
EP2511267A1 (en) 2003-06-05 2012-10-17 Elan Pharmaceuticals Inc. 3-((n-acylated aminoacyl)amino)pyrazoles as inhibitors of beta-amyloid peptide production useful for the treatment of alzheimer's disease
WO2012172449A1 (en) 2011-06-13 2012-12-20 Pfizer Inc. Lactams as beta secretase inhibitors
US8691185B2 (en) 2003-08-22 2014-04-08 University of Pittsburgh—of the Commonwealth System of Higher Education Benzothiazole derivative compounds, compositions and uses
US8911707B2 (en) 2000-08-24 2014-12-16 University of Pittsburgh—of the Commonwealth System of Higher Education Thioflavin derivatives for use in antemortem diagnosis of alzheimer's disease and in vivo imaging and prevention of amyloid deposition
US9833458B2 (en) 2000-08-24 2017-12-05 University of Pittsburgh—of the Commonwealth System of Higher Education Thioflavin derivatives for use in the antemortem diagnosis of Alzheimer's disease and in vivo imaging and prevention of amyloid deposition
CN111777571A (en) * 2020-06-28 2020-10-16 武汉药明康德新药开发有限公司 Synthesis method of chiral 2-amino-3- (1, 3-benzothiazole-2-yl) propionic acid hydrochloride

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
BRPI0408274B8 (en) * 2003-03-14 2021-05-25 Univ Pittsburgh amyloid binding compounds and pharmaceutical composition
CN100999546B (en) * 2007-01-11 2010-08-11 清华大学 Polypeptide compound with aza-containing heterocyclic modification and its application

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1995009838A1 (en) * 1993-10-01 1995-04-13 Merrell Pharmaceuticals Inc. INHIBITORS OF β-AMYLOID PROTEIN PRODUCTION
WO1996020725A2 (en) * 1995-01-06 1996-07-11 Sibia Neurosciences, Inc. Peptide, peptide analog and amino acid analog protease inhibitors

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO1995009838A1 (en) * 1993-10-01 1995-04-13 Merrell Pharmaceuticals Inc. INHIBITORS OF β-AMYLOID PROTEIN PRODUCTION
WO1996020725A2 (en) * 1995-01-06 1996-07-11 Sibia Neurosciences, Inc. Peptide, peptide analog and amino acid analog protease inhibitors

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
Tetrahedron, Volume 24, 1968, Y. Iwakura et al, "Reaction Of Alkylidenepseudoxazolones With Amines", page 575 - page 583, XP002900183 *

Cited By (64)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US7304056B2 (en) 1998-08-07 2007-12-04 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Succinoylamino lactams as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US7101870B2 (en) 1998-08-07 2006-09-05 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Succinoylamino lactams as inhibitors of A-β protein production
US6962913B2 (en) 1998-08-07 2005-11-08 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Benzo-1,4-diazepin-2-ones as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US6794381B1 (en) 1998-08-07 2004-09-21 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Succinoylamino lactams as inhibitors of aβ protein
US7507815B2 (en) 1998-08-07 2009-03-24 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Succinoylamino lactams as inhibitors of a-β protein production
US7304055B2 (en) 1998-08-07 2007-12-04 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Succinoylamino lactams as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US6486350B1 (en) 1998-09-30 2002-11-26 Elan Pharmaceuticals Inc. Biological reagents and methods for determining the mechanism in the generation of β-amyloid peptide
US7153491B2 (en) 1998-11-12 2006-12-26 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Use of small molecule radioligands to discover inhibitors of amyloid-beta peptide production and for diagnostic imaging
US7304049B2 (en) 1998-12-24 2007-12-04 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Succinoylaminobenzodiazepines as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US7718795B2 (en) 1998-12-24 2010-05-18 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Succinoylamino benzodiazepines as inhibitors of aβ protein production
US7456172B2 (en) 1998-12-24 2008-11-25 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Succinoylamino benzodiazepines as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US7053084B1 (en) 1998-12-24 2006-05-30 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Succinoylamino benzodiazepines as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US7342008B2 (en) 1999-09-13 2008-03-11 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Hydroxyalkanoylaminolactams and related structures as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US6503902B2 (en) 1999-09-13 2003-01-07 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Hydroxyalkanoylaminolactams and related structures as inhibitors of a β protein production
US7112583B2 (en) 1999-09-13 2006-09-26 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Hydroxyalkanoylaminolactams and related structures as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US7423033B2 (en) 1999-09-13 2008-09-09 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Hydroxyalkanoylaminolactams and related structures as inhibitors of aβ protein production
US6960576B2 (en) 1999-09-13 2005-11-01 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Hydroxyalkanoylaminolactams and related structures as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US6503901B1 (en) 1999-10-08 2003-01-07 Bristol Myers Squibb Pharma Company Amino lactam sulfonamides as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US6525044B2 (en) 2000-02-17 2003-02-25 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Succinoylamino carbocycles and heterocycles as inhibitors of a-β protein production
US7528249B2 (en) 2000-04-03 2009-05-05 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Cyclic malonamides as inhibitors of aβ protein production
US7390896B2 (en) 2000-04-03 2008-06-24 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Corporation Cyclic malonamides as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US7053081B2 (en) 2000-04-03 2006-05-30 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Cyclic malonamides as inhibitors of A-β protein production
US7276496B2 (en) 2000-04-03 2007-10-02 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Cyclic malonamides as inhibitors of Aβ protein protection
US6759404B2 (en) 2000-04-03 2004-07-06 Richard E. Olson Cyclic malonamides as inhibitors of aβ protein production
US6713476B2 (en) 2000-04-03 2004-03-30 Dupont Pharmaceuticals Company Substituted cycloalkyls as inhibitors of a beta protein production
US6900199B2 (en) 2000-04-11 2005-05-31 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Substituted lactams as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US7498324B2 (en) 2000-04-11 2009-03-03 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Substituted lactams as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US7276495B2 (en) 2000-04-11 2007-10-02 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Substituted lactams as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US7390802B2 (en) 2000-04-11 2008-06-24 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Corporation Substituted lactams as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US7655647B2 (en) 2000-04-11 2010-02-02 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Substituted lactams as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US6878363B2 (en) 2000-05-17 2005-04-12 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Use of small molecule radioligands to discover inhibitors of amyloid-beta peptide production and for diagnostic imaging
US6958329B2 (en) 2000-06-01 2005-10-25 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Lactams substituted by cyclic succinates as inhibitors of A-β protein production
US7456278B2 (en) 2000-06-01 2008-11-25 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Corporation Lactams substituted by cyclic succinates as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US7354914B2 (en) 2000-06-01 2008-04-08 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Lactams substituted by cyclic succinates as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US6509333B2 (en) 2000-06-01 2003-01-21 Bristol-Myers Squibb Pharma Company Lactams substituted by cyclic succinates as inhibitors of Aβ protein production
US6432944B1 (en) 2000-07-06 2002-08-13 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Benzodiazepinone β-amyloid inhibitors: arylacetamidoalanyl derivatives
US8911707B2 (en) 2000-08-24 2014-12-16 University of Pittsburgh—of the Commonwealth System of Higher Education Thioflavin derivatives for use in antemortem diagnosis of alzheimer's disease and in vivo imaging and prevention of amyloid deposition
US10137210B2 (en) 2000-08-24 2018-11-27 The University of Pittsburgh—Of the Commonwealth System of Higher Education Thioflavin derivatives for use in antemortem diagnosis of Alzheimer's disease and in vivo imaging and prevention of amyloid deposition
US9833458B2 (en) 2000-08-24 2017-12-05 University of Pittsburgh—of the Commonwealth System of Higher Education Thioflavin derivatives for use in the antemortem diagnosis of Alzheimer's disease and in vivo imaging and prevention of amyloid deposition
US9808541B2 (en) 2000-08-24 2017-11-07 University of Pittsburgh—Of the Commonwealth System of Higher Eduation Thioflavin derivatives for use in antemortem diagnosis of Alzheimer's disease and in vivo imaging and prevention of amyloid deposition
US6610734B2 (en) 2000-12-13 2003-08-26 Wyeth Heterocyclic sulfonamide inhibitors of beta amyloid production
US7691884B2 (en) 2000-12-13 2010-04-06 Wyeth Heterocyclic sulfonamide inhibitors of β amyloid production
US6657070B2 (en) 2000-12-13 2003-12-02 Wyeth Production of chirally pure α-amino acids and N-sulfonyl α-amino acids
US7842718B2 (en) 2000-12-13 2010-11-30 Wyeth Llc Heterocyclic sulfonamide inhibitors of beta amyloid production
US6878742B2 (en) 2000-12-13 2005-04-12 Wyeth Heterocyclic sulfonamide inhibitors of beta amyloid production
DE10259834B4 (en) * 2001-12-20 2007-11-29 F. Hoffmann-La Roche Ag Test and screening method for the identification of inhibitors of beta-secretases
WO2004071381A3 (en) * 2003-02-13 2004-11-18 Gruenenthal Gmbh Drugs containing substituted 2-aryl-aminoacetic acid compounds and/or substituted 2-heteroaryl-aminoacetic acid compounds
WO2004071381A2 (en) * 2003-02-13 2004-08-26 Grünenthal GmbH Drugs containing substituted 2-aryl-aminoacetic acid compounds and/or substituted 2-heteroaryl-aminoacetic acid compounds
US7432296B2 (en) 2003-02-13 2008-10-07 Gruenenthal Gmbh Pharmaceutical formulations containing substituted 2-aryl-aminoacetic acid compounds and/or substituted 2-heteroaryl-aminoacetic acid compounds
US7300951B2 (en) 2003-03-31 2007-11-27 Wyeth Fluoro- and trifluoroalkyl-containing heterocyclic sulfonamide inhibitors of beta amyloid production and derivatives thereof
US7547725B2 (en) 2003-03-31 2009-06-16 Wyeth Fluoro- and trifluoroalkyl-containing heterocyclic sulfonamide inhibitors of beta amyloid production and derivatives thereof
US7858658B2 (en) 2003-03-31 2010-12-28 Wyeth Llc Fluoro- and trifluoroalkyl-containing heterocyclic sulfonamide inhibitors of beta amyloid production and derivatives thereof
EP2511267A1 (en) 2003-06-05 2012-10-17 Elan Pharmaceuticals Inc. 3-((n-acylated aminoacyl)amino)pyrazoles as inhibitors of beta-amyloid peptide production useful for the treatment of alzheimer's disease
US9134328B2 (en) 2003-08-22 2015-09-15 University of Pittsburgh—of the Commonwealth System of Higher Education Methods of using benzothiazole derivative compounds and compositions
US8691185B2 (en) 2003-08-22 2014-04-08 University of Pittsburgh—of the Commonwealth System of Higher Education Benzothiazole derivative compounds, compositions and uses
US7674813B2 (en) 2004-01-16 2010-03-09 Wyeth Heterocyclic sulfonamide inhibitors of beta amyloid production containing an azole
US7399778B2 (en) 2004-01-16 2008-07-15 Wyeth Heterocyclic sulfonamide inhibitors of beta amyloid production containing an azole
US7723385B2 (en) 2004-03-03 2010-05-25 Glaxosmithkline Llc Aniline derivatives as selective androgen receptor modulators
US7514470B2 (en) 2004-03-03 2009-04-07 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Aniline derivatives as selective androgen receptor modulators
WO2005085185A1 (en) * 2004-03-03 2005-09-15 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Aniline derivatives as selective androgen receptor modulators
EP1871379A4 (en) * 2005-04-15 2010-06-02 Glaxosmithkline Llc Cyanoarylamines
EP1871379A2 (en) * 2005-04-15 2008-01-02 Smithkline Beecham Corporation Cyanoarylamines
WO2012172449A1 (en) 2011-06-13 2012-12-20 Pfizer Inc. Lactams as beta secretase inhibitors
CN111777571A (en) * 2020-06-28 2020-10-16 武汉药明康德新药开发有限公司 Synthesis method of chiral 2-amino-3- (1, 3-benzothiazole-2-yl) propionic acid hydrochloride

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
IL129477A0 (en) 2000-02-29
BR9714358A (en) 2000-03-21
EP0942923A2 (en) 1999-09-22
NO992426L (en) 1999-06-30
AU5354398A (en) 1998-06-10
CN1237978A (en) 1999-12-08
NZ335157A (en) 2001-01-26
HUP0001383A1 (en) 2001-05-28
WO1998022493A3 (en) 1998-07-23
HUP0001383A3 (en) 2001-11-28
ID22275A (en) 1999-09-23
JP2001519769A (en) 2001-10-23
NO992426D0 (en) 1999-05-20
CA2270876A1 (en) 1998-05-28
TR199901132T2 (en) 1999-08-23

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO1998022493A2 (en) N-(ARYL/HETEROARYL) AMINO ACID DERIVATIVES, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING SAME, AND METHODS FOR INHIBITING β-AMYLOID PEPTIDE RELEASE AND/OR ITS SYNTHESIS BY USE OF SUCH COMPOUNDS
EP0946499B1 (en) N-(aryl/heteroaryl/alkylacetyl) amino acid amides, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting beta-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6888022B2 (en) Methods and compounds for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis
EP0951464B1 (en) N-(aryl/heteroarylacetyl) amino acid esters, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting beta-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6495693B2 (en) N-(aryl/heteroaryl) amino acid derivatives, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
CZ122899A3 (en) Process and compounds for inhibition of release and/or synthesis of beta-amyloid peptide
WO1998022494A9 (en) METHODS AND COMPOUNDS FOR INHIBITING β-AMYLOID PEPTIDE RELEASE AND/OR SYNTHESIS
JP2008502720A (en) Bacterial efflux pump inhibitors and methods of treating bacterial infections
WO1998022441A2 (en) N-(aryl/heteroaryl) amino acid esters, pharmaceutical compositions, and methods for inhibiting beta-amyloid peptide and/or its synthesis
US6432944B1 (en) Benzodiazepinone β-amyloid inhibitors: arylacetamidoalanyl derivatives
US6262302B1 (en) N-(aryl/heteroaryl/alkylacetyl) amino acid amides, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US7205336B2 (en) β-secretase inhibitors
US6399628B1 (en) N-(aryl/heteroaryl) amino acid esters, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting alpha- amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
US6313152B1 (en) N(aryl/heteroarylacetyl) amino acid esters, pharmaceutical compositions comprising same, and methods for inhibiting β-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis by use of such compounds
CA2388750A1 (en) .beta.-aminoacid compounds useful for inhibiting .beta.-amyloid peptide release and/or its synthesis
MXPA99004527A (en) N-(ARYL/HETEROARYL) AMINO ACID DERIVATIVES, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING SAME, AND METHODS FOR INHIBITING&amp;bgr;-AMYLOID PEPTIDE RELEASE AND/OR ITS SYNTHESIS BY USE OF SUCH COMPOUNDS
CZ9901423A3 (en) Derivatives of N-(ARYL/HETEROARYL) amino acids, pharmaceutical composition preparation in which they are comprised and inhibition methods of ›-AMYLOID PEPTIDE release and/or their synthesis by making use of these compounds
KR20000069066A (en) N-(Aryl/Heteroaryl)Amino Acid Derivatives, Pharmaceutical Compositions Comprising Same, and Methods for Inhibiting β-Amyloid Peptide and/or Its Synthesis by Use of Such Compounds
CZ9901630A3 (en) Amines of N-(aryl/heteroaryl/alkylacetyl)amino acids, pharmaceutical compositions in which they are comprised and inhibition methods of releasing beta-amyloid peptide and/or synthesis thereof by making use of such compounds
MXPA99004394A (en) N-(ARYL/HETEROARYL/ALKYLACETYL) AMINO ACID AMIDES, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS COMPRISING SAME, AND METHODS FOR INHIBITING&amp;bgr;-AMYLOID PEPTIDE RELEASE AND/OR ITS SYNTHESIS BY USE OF SUCH COMPOUNDS

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 97199776.4

Country of ref document: CN

AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BY CA CH CN CU CZ DE DK EE ES FI GB GE GH HU ID IL IS JP KE KG KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MD MG MK MN MW MX NO NZ PL PT RO RU SD SE SG SI SK SL TJ TM TR TT UA UG US UZ VN YU ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A2

Designated state(s): GH KE LS MW SD SZ UG ZW AT BE CH DE DK ES FI FR GB GR IE IT LU MC

DFPE Request for preliminary examination filed prior to expiration of 19th month from priority date (pct application filed before 20040101)
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 335157

Country of ref document: NZ

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 53543/98

Country of ref document: AU

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: PV1999-1423

Country of ref document: CZ

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2270876

Country of ref document: CA

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 1998 523649

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: PA/a/1999/004527

Country of ref document: MX

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1019997004489

Country of ref document: KR

Ref document number: 1999/01132

Country of ref document: TR

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 1997950576

Country of ref document: EP

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1997950576

Country of ref document: EP

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: DE

Ref legal event code: 8642

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1019997004489

Country of ref document: KR

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: PV1999-1423

Country of ref document: CZ

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Ref document number: 1019997004489

Country of ref document: KR